Nokia N93 User Manual
Nokia N93 User guide 9245 183 ISSUE 2 EN
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION, declares that this RM-55 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other releva nt provisio ns of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be fo und at http://www .nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ The crossed-out wheeled bin means that within the Euro pean Union the product must be taken to separ ate co llection at the p roduct end-of-life. This applies to your device but also to any enhancement s marked with this symbol. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country specific information at www.nokia.com. é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseri es, N93, Visual Radio, and Pop-Port are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or traden ames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transf er, distribution, or storag e of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-2006. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are t rademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information w hich has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is gra nted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that relating to promotional, internal, and commercial use s may be obtained f rom MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, NO WAR RANTIES OF A NY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR I MPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WA RRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AND FITNES S FOR A PAR TICULAR P URPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please ch e ck your Nokia dealer for de tails, and availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or softwar e subject to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence received , including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the userâÂÂs authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been cre ated and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications.
BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLIC ATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IM PLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU F URTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE, ME RCHANTABILITY OR FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WI LL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATE NTS, COP YRIGHTS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RI GHTS. Issue 2 EN, 9245183
Contents For your safety ................................. .......... 7 Get connected .......................................... 10 Your Nokia N93 ........................ ............... 11 Modes .......... .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ....... 11 Shortcuts ............. ................ .............. ............. .............. ......... 13 Settings ............ ................ ............. .............. .............. ............. 14 Transfer content from another de vice ................... ....... 14 Essential indicators....... ............. ................ .............. ........... 15 Keypad lock (key guard) .......... .............. ................ ............. 16 Volume and loudspeaker cont rol ....................... ............. 16 Clock .......... .............. ............. ................ .............. ............. ....... 16 Headset .......... ............. .............. ........... .............. ............. ....... 17 Wrist and lens cover st raps ............ ................ ................ .. 17 Wireless LAN .................. ................ ............. .............. ........... 17 Home network ................... ................ .............. ............. ....... 19 Web browser .................... ................ ............. .............. ......... 19 Memory card .................. ................ ............. .............. ........... 20 File manager .......... ............. .............. ................ ............. ....... 21 Help .............. .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ....... 22 Tutorial ............. ............. .............. .............. ................ ............. 22 Camera ........................ .............................. 23 Record videos ........... .............. ............. ................ .............. ... 23 Take pictures ................ ................ .............. .............. ............ 25 Gallery................. ............................... ....... 30 View images and video clips ......... ........... .................. ...... 31 Edit video clips .... ............ .................................. ........... ........ 31 Edit images ................... .............. .............. ............. ............... 33 Slide show ............ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 33 TV out mode ........... ...................... ....................... ........... ...... 34 Presentations................ .............. .............. ................ ............ 34 Albums ............ ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. . 35 Print online ............... ................ ............. .............. ................ . 35 Online sharing ................... .............. ............. ................ ........ 36 Media applications .................................. 39 Music play er ............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ...... 39 Image print ................. ................ .............. ............. .............. . 42 Back up files ............... .............. ............. ................ .............. . 43 Messaging................... .............................. 44 Write text ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. ........ 45 Write and send mess ages ..................... ................ ............ 47
InboxâÂÂreceive messages ................... ............. ................ ... 49 Mailbox...... ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. ....... 50 View messag es on a SIM card ................ ............. ............52 Messaging se ttings . .......... ............. ................ .............. ....... 52 Make calls .................................... ........... 57 Voice calls ............ ............. .............. .............. ............. ............ 57 Video calls....... .............. .............. ............... .............. ..............59 Video sharing ................. .............. ................ ............. ............ 60 Answer or reject a call .................. .............. .............. ......... 63 Log ........... .............. ................ ............. .............. .............. .........64 Contacts (phonebook) ........................ .... 67 Save names an d numbers ............... ............. ................ ..... 67 Copy contacts .............. ................ ............. .............. ..............68 Add ringing tones for contacts................... ................ ..... 69 Create contact groups.......... ................ .............. ................69 Services ......................... ........................... 70 Web access point...... ...................... ..................... ......... ....... 70 Bookmarks v iew ............ ................ .............. ............. ............ 70 Connection security ............ .............. ............... .............. ..... 71 Browse ................ ............. .............. ............. .............. ..............71 Download and purchase ite ms ............ ................ ............ 72 End a connection ................. .............. ............... ................ ... 72 Web settings ........... .............. .............. ............. ................ ..... 73 Calendar. ...................................... .............74 Create calendar ent ries ..................... ................ ............. ... 74 Meeting requests. .............. ................ ............. .............. ....... 74 Calendar views .............. ................ .............. ............. ............ 75 Manage your calendar entries........... ................ .............. 75 Calendar settings ................ ................ ............. .............. ..... 75 My own .. ............................... ....................76 Visual Radio ......... ........... .................................. ............ ....... 76 RealPlayer ....... ............ ........................................... ......... ....... 78 Flash Player ................ ............. .............. ................ ............. ... 80 Movie director ............. .............. ............. .............. ................ 81 Games ................... ............. .............. .............. ............. ............ 82 Connectivity ........................................ .....83 PC connections .................... ................ ............. .............. ..... 83 Data cable .................... .............. ............. ................ .............. 83 Bluetooth connectivity ............. ................ ................ ......... 83 Infrared connection ................... ................ ................ ......... 87 Home network........... ............. ................ .............. ................ 88 Synchronization ................. ............. ................ .............. ....... 91 Connection manager ................... ................ ................ ....... 91 Device manager ................. ............. ................ .............. ....... 92 Modem ......... .............. ............. ................ .............. ............. ... 93 Office ............. .............................. .............94
Recorder........... ............. ................ .............. .............. ............. 94 Converter .................... .............. ............. .............. .............. .... 94 Calculator ................... .............. ................ ............. .............. .. 94 Notes .................... .............. .............. ............. .............. ........... 95 Zip manager................. ............ ...................................... ....... 95 Quickoffice ............... ................ ............. .............. ................ .. 95 Adobe reader ......... ...................... .................................. ....... 97 Barcode reader................. .............. ............. ................ ......... 98 Personalize your device ........................ 100 ProfilesâÂÂset tones........... ................ ............. ................ ..... 100 Change the look of your device .. ........... .................. ..... 101 Active standby mode...... ........... .................................. ..... 102 Tools .... ....................................... ............ 103 Multimedia key ........... .............. ................ .............. ........... 103 Settings ............ ................ ............. .............. .............. ........... 103 TV configuration .......... .............. .............. ................ ..........114 Voice commands ............ ...................... ....................... ...... 114 Application manager ....... ........... ....................... ......... ...... 114 Activation keys for copyrigh t-prot ected files ...........117 Troubleshooting . ................................... 118 Q&A............... .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. .... 118 Battery information ............................. 122 Charging and discharging.............. ................ ................ . 122 Nokia battery authe ntication guidelines ...................122 Care and maintenance ...... ................... 125 Additional safety information . ............ 126 Index ................................... ................... 129
7 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while drivi ng should be road safety. INTERFEREN CE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Foll ow any restrictions. Wireless devi ces can cause interference in aircra ft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir this product. ENHANCEMENTS AN D BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
8 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVI CES When connecting t o any other devi ce, read its use r guide for deta iled safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGEN CY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. The keypad is active only in the fold-open mode. Press the end key as many times as needed to clea r the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is app roved for use on the EGSM 900, 1800 , 1900, and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information abo ut networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like computers, your devi ce may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmfu l content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To incr ease the security of your device, consider installing anti virus software with a regular update service and using a firewall application. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. This device supports common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 97, 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats ca n be viewed or modified. During operation, su ch as an active video shar ing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have some bookmarks or links preinstalled for or may allow access to si tes provi ded by third parties not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not endorse or assume any liability for these sites. If you c hoose to access
9 them, you should take the same prec autions, for security or content, as you woul d with any internet site. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not be available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur se rvice provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what c harges will apply. Some networ ks may have li mitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some network s may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activ ated in your device. If so , these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more informa tion. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail, and content downl oading using the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the ba ttery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a DC-4, AC-3, or AC-4 charger, and from an AC-1, ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-4 4 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6M. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approv ed enhancements, please chec k with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Get connected 10 Get connected Use your device on the 2G and 3G networks. See âÂÂYour Nokia N93â p.11 Use Bluetooth technology, for example, to transfer files and connect to compatible enhancements. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâ p. 83. Use infrared to transfer and synchronize data between compatible devices, for example. See âÂÂInfrared connect ionâ p. 87. Use a wireless LAN to connect to the internet and WLAN enabled devices. See âÂÂWireless LANâ p. 92. Use Nokia Connectivity Cable CA-53 to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See âÂÂData cableâ p. 83. Use Nokia Video Cable CA-64U to connect to a compatible TV. See âÂÂTV configurationâ p. 114. Use a compatibl e microSD card to tra nsfer data or back up information, for example. See âÂÂMemory card toolâ p. 20.
Your Nokia N93 11 Your Nokia N93 Model number: Nokia N93-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N93. Modes Your device has four mechanic al modes that are optimized for different us es: fold closed fo r carrying, f old open for traditional mobile phone use, image for recording video and taking pictures, and view for v iewing your images and videos. To switch between the modes, turn the fold and the swing axis display. There is a short time-out before a mode is activated. Fold-closed mode When the fold is closed, th e main display deactivates and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls end, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a compatible headset is connected. To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 104. If you are using the player to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play . In the fold-closed mode, the cover display provides clock and status information. On the standby mode display, the signal strength and battery indicators, time information, status indicators, and the name of the active profile (if other than General ) may be shown. If you use the music player to listen to a sound clip, volume bars and track information ar e displayed. Use the side scroll ke ys to play, pause, play the next or previous sound clip, and turn the volume up or down. If you are using Visual Radio in the fold-closed mode, the visual content is not shown on the cover display. You ca n store several preset stations with station name, frequency, and location information. Th is information is s hown on the cover display. To turn the audio on and off, change the channel, and seek new channels, use the scroll key on the side of the device. Calendar and clock alarms and notes for missed calls and new received messages are also displayed. To vie w received text messages and the text and image objects of received multimedia messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main display. Incoming calls are indica ted by their normal tone and a note. In the cover display settings, sel ect Answer if fold opened to answer a call when you open the fold. If a
Your Nokia N93 12 compatible headset is connected to the device, press the answer key on the headset. To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 104. To make calls or use the menu, open the fold. To use the flash as a flashlight, press the flash key on the side of the device. To operate the flashlight, do the following: ⢠Quickly press th e flash key once. The flashli ght is activated for 1.5 seconds. ⢠Quickly p ress the flash ke y twice. The flashlight is activated for 3 minutes or until you press the flash key again. ⢠Press and hold the flash key. The flashlight is activated and stays on for as long as you hold the key or until the 3-minute time-out ends. Fold-open mode When you open the fold, the fold-open mode is activated automatically: the mai n display lights up, the k eypad is available, and you ca n access the menu. Scroll in the menu. The fold-open mode is activated even if the fold is not fully opened. The fold opens about 160 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more. Image mode When you open the fold to 90 degrees, hold the device sideways, turn the fold down so that the main display faces you, and the image mode is activated. The main camera is activated, and you can see the image to be captured. In image mode, yo u can record videos and take pictures. See âÂÂCameraâÂÂ, p. 23. In image mode, the numeric keypad is not active. You can use the capture key, zoom key, side scroll key, camera mode key, and flash key (all located on the side of the device), power key, and the landscape selec tion keys next to the main display. View mode When the fold is closed and you lift the side of the swing axis dis play when the fold is closed, the view mode is activated.
Your Nokia N93 13 Use the view mode to do the following: ⢠View your images. ⢠Activate photos and movies from the gallery to watch slideshows. ⢠Make hands-free video calls, and send live vi deo during a video call. Adjust the angle of the display for optimum secondary camera angle. Shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guid e for further details of the functions. Standby mode To switch between applicatio ns that are open, press and hold , and select an application. If memory is low, the device may close some applications. The device saves any unsaved data before closing an application. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To start the camera, fully pr ess the capture key in image mode. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold . To open multimedia applications , press and hold . See âÂÂMultimedia keyâÂÂ, p. 103. To change the profile, press , and select a profile. To switch between General and Silent , press and hold . If you have two phone lin es, this action switches between the two lines. To open the last dialed numbers list, press . To use voice commands, press and hold . To start a connection to Services , press and hold . See âÂÂServicesâÂÂ, p. 70. For other shortcuts available in the standby mode, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. Edit text and lists To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then .
Your Nokia N93 14 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or to highlight text. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Settings Your Nokia device normally has MMS, GPRS, strea ming, and mobile internet setting s automatically configured, based upon your service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice provider already installed in your device, or you may receive the settings from the service provider as a special text message. Transfer content from another device You can copy content such as contacts a nd calendar entries from a compatible Nokia device to your Nokia device using Bluetooth connecti vity or infr ared. The type of content that can be cop ied depends on the phone model. You can insert your SIM card in the other device. When your Nokia device is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is au tomatically activated. Transfer content 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer . 2 In the information view, select Continue . 3 Select whether you want to use Bluetooth connectivity or infrared to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. 4 If you select Bluetooth connectivity, to have your Nokia device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the other device from the list. You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia device. Enter a code (1-16 digits ), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. For some phone models, Transfer is sent to the other device as a message. To install Transfer on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. If you select infrared, connect the tw o devices. See âÂÂInfrared connectionâÂÂ, p. 87. 5 From your Nokia device, select t he content you want to copy from the other device. Content is copied from the memory and compat ible memory card (if inserted) of the other device to the corresponding location in your Nokia device and memory card (if ins erted). The copyin g time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continue later.
Your Nokia N93 15 To view the log information of a previous transfer, in the main view, select Transfer log . To view the de vices you have copied or transferred data from, in the main view, select Phones . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You ha ve one or mor e unread m essages in the Inbox folder in Messag. . You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sen t in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail a lert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is ac tive. The second phone line is be ing used (network service). All calls to t he device ar e forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines (network service), the indicator for the first line is and for the second . A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is available. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is active. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available. A UMTS packet data connection is active. A UMTS packet data connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is a vailabl e. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 109. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on.
Your Nokia N93 16 Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. A USB connection is active. An infrared connection is a ctive. I f the indi cator is blinking, the device is trying to connec t to the other device or the connection has been lost. Keypad lock (keyguard) Use the keypad lock to prevent accidental keypresses. To turn on the displ ay light when the keypad lo ck is on, press . ⢠To lock, pr ess , then . Whe n the keys are locked, is shown on the display. ⢠To unlock with the fold-open, press , then . ⢠To unlock with the fold-closed, press and hold the camera mode key. When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or . The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker duri ng a call, select Option s > Activate loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate handset . Clock Select Clock application. To set a new alarm, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is ac tive, is shown. To turn off the ala rm, select Stop , or to stop th e alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not
Your Nokia N93 17 select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an ala rm, select Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock set tings, select Clock > Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone informa tio n to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the ala rm tone, select Clock alarm tone . World clock To open the world clock view, op en Clock , and press . In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to th e city selected. Check that the time is correct and match es your time zone. Headset Connect a compatible headset to the Pop-Port TM connector of your de vice. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Wrist and lens cover straps Thread the straps as shown, and tighten them. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (wireless LAN). With wireless LAN, you can
Your Nokia N93 18 connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have wireless LAN. For information about using your device in a home network, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 19. To use wireless LAN, a wireless LAN must be avilable in the location, and your device must be connected to the wireless LAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LA N. Check with your local auth orities for mor e information . Features using wireless LAN, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the follo wing wireless LAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at a frequency of 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (W EP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WP A), and 802.1x encryption methods. These f unctions can be used on ly if they are supported by the network. Wireless LAN connections To use wireless LAN, you must crea te an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the intern et. See âÂÂWireless LAN access pointsâ in t he Additional applications guide. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unaut horized ac ce ss to y our data. A wireless LAN connection is established when you cr eate a data connection using a wi reless LA N Internet access point. The active wireless LAN connection ends when you end the data connection. To end the connection, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 91. You can use wireless LA N duri ng a vo ice call or when packet data is active. Yo u ca n only be connected to one wireless LAN a ccess point devi ce at a time, but seve ral applications can use the sa me wireless LAN connection. When you activate Offline , you can still us e wireless LAN (if available). Rem ember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when esta blishing and using a wireless LAN connection. Tip! To check the unique media access c ontrol (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. For information about WLAN wizard, see âÂÂWLAN wizardâ in the Additional applications guide.
Your Nokia N93 19 Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP. With a wireless LAN access point device, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support wireless LAN to the network, such as your Noki a device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or a TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. After you have configured the home network, you can copy, view, or play compatible media files and print images in Gallery on the other connected compatible devices, for example, view images stored on your No kia device on a compatible TV. See âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 88 and âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. To set up home n etworking in you r wireless LAN, first create and configure your wireless LAN home Internet access point, then configure the devices. On your Nokia device, configure the settings in Home net. . To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the Media Server software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your Nokia device. After you have completed the necessary configura tions in all devices connec ted to the network, you can st art using Home net. to share your med ia files. See âÂÂView media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. Web browser Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), ext ensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext markup la nguage (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Press , and select Internet > Web . With this additional browser, you are able to view normal web pages, to zoom in and ou t on a page (Mini Map), to view web pages that contain only text in narrow form so that text wraps, and to read feeds and blogs. To turn the Mini Map on or off for the current page, press . When the Mini Map is on, an overview of the complete page is shown when you scroll on the page. See also âÂÂWeb access pointâÂÂ, p. 70.
Your Nokia N93 20 Memory card You can use a compatible miniSD card as extra storage space to save the memory on your device. You can also back up information fr om your device to the memory card. Use only compatible miniSD cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as Redu ced Size MultiMediaCards, do not fit in the memory card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the m emory card a s well as the de vice, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Insert the memory card 1 To open the door of the memory card slot, swing it upwards in a counterclockwise direction. 2 Insert the m emory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is fa cing up. 3 Push the card in. You hear a click when the card locks into place. 4 Close the door. Eject the mem ory card 1 Before you eject the card, press , and sel ect Remove mem. card . All applications are closed. 2 When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, swing open the door of the memory card slot. 3 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 4 Remove the memory card. If the device is switche d on, select OK when prompted to confirm the removal. Important : Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the car d is bein g accesse d. Removing the card in the middle of a n operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Memory card tool Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a compatible miniSD card as extra storage sp ace and for backing up the information in the device memory. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem.
Your Nokia N93 21 To restore info rmation from the m emory card to the device memory, select Options > Restore from card . Format a memory card When a memory card is reform atted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplie d preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To format a memory card, se lect Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. Tip! For opti mal performance, use your Nokia device to format all new miniSD ca rds. File manager Many features of the dev ice, such as contacts, messages, images, videos, ringing tones, calendar notes, documents, and downloaded applications, use memory to store data. The free memory available depends on how much data is already saved in the device memory. You can use a compatible mini SD card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewritable, so you can delete old information and save new data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the device memory or on a memory card (if inserted), press , and select T ools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ) (if available). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Option s > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory f rom which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file name. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Me mory details . The amount of available memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The device notifies you if the device or the memory card memory is low.
Your Nokia N93 22 To free device memory, tran sfer data to a compatible memory card, if you have on e. Mark files to be moved, and select Move to folder > Memory card and a fo lder. You can also trans fer media files to a compatible PC, for example, using the transfer option in Gallery. See âÂÂBack up filesâÂÂ, p. 43. Tip! Use Nokia Phone Browser in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memori es in your device and transfer data. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. or the respective app lication. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages from the Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messag. ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact info rmation â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also âÂÂApplication managerâÂÂ, p. 114. ⢠Any other data that you no longer need After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation fi les (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to ba ck up installation files to a compatible PC, then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message atta chment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view its help topics. Tutorial The tutorial gives you information about some of the features of your device. To ac cess the tutorial i n the menu, press , and select My own > Tutorial and the section you want to v iew.
Camera 23 Camera Your Nokia N93 has two cameras, a high-resolution camera on the side of the de vice (the main camera) and a lower-resolution camera on the top of the main display (the secondary camera). You can use both cameras to take still images and record video in the portrait and landscape views. The Nokia N93 device supports an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels using the main camer a. The image resolution in these ma terials may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ideo folder in Gallery . The cameras pr oduce .jpg images. Video clips are recorded in the .mp4 file format or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension ( Sharing modes). See âÂÂVideo settingsâ , p. 24. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachme nt or by using B luetooth connectivity. Record videos To activate the main camera rotate the display to image mode. If the camera is in image mode, use the camera mode key, or se lect Options > Switch to video mode to switch to video mode. Press the capture key to start recording. The record icon is displayed and a tone sounds. The red recording indicator is lit, indicating that video is being recorded. 1 To stop recording at any time, press the capture key. 2 To pause the recording, select Pause; to resume recording, select Continue . The video clip is automatically saved to Images & video in Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video in the imaging mode, scroll through the toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28 and âÂÂShooting modesâÂÂ, p. 28. To zoom in or out of the subject (continuous 3x optical and up to 20x digital zoom), rotate the zoom key on the side of the device. The video viewfinder displays the following:
Camera 24 ⢠Status indicators (1) for audio mute on, stabilization on, video light mode, and the current capture mode. ⢠The toolbar (2), which you can scroll through before recording to select the shooting mode, white balance, and color tone (the toolbar is not displayed during rec ording). ⢠The total available video recording time (3). When you are recording, the current vi deo length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. ⢠The device memory ( ) and me mory card ( ) indicators (4) show where videos are saved. ⢠The video quality indicator (5) indicates whether the quality of the video is TV (high) , TV (normal), Handset (high) , Handset (normal) , or Sharing . ⢠The video clip file type (6). Tip! Select Options > Turn icons on to display all viewfinder indicators or Turn icons off to di splay only the video status indicators. After you record a video clip, select the following from the toolbar: ⢠To immedia tely play the video clip you jus t recorded, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video using multimedia, e-mail , Bluetooth connectivity, or infrared, press , or select Sen d . For more information, see âÂÂMe ssagingâÂÂ, p. 44 and âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 83. This option is not available dur ing an active call. Yo u cannot send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠To record a new video clip, select New video . Tip! Activate the Offline profile to ensure your video recording is not interrupted by incoming calls. Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video se tup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. T o change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect Off if you do not wa nt to record sound. Exit Options Exit Options
Camera 25 Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to TV (high) (best quality for long term usage and play back on a compatible TV or PC and handset), TV (normal) , Handset (high) , Handset (normal) , or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using multimedia message (MMS) ). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV (high) , which has VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. To send the vide o clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). T he size of th e video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in durati on) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Video stabilisation âÂÂSelect On to reduce camera sh ake when recording the video. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded vi deo clip to a cer tain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured vide o âÂÂSel ect whet her you wan t the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the video clip. Optical zoom during recording âÂÂSelect On or Off . Select Off to eliminate mechanical noise caused by lens movement during optical zooming when recording. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: device memory or memory card (if inserted). Take pictures To activate the main camera rotate the display to image mode. If the camera is in video mode, use the camera mode key, or select Options > Switch to image mode to switch to image mode. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (m ain camera only) . The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it half way down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. To take a picture, in the ma in camera, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture in image mode, scroll through the toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings. The camera viewfinder displays the following:
Camera 26 ⢠Status indicators (1) for sequence on, self-timer on; Automatic () , On () , or Off () flash mode, and the current capture mode. ⢠The toolbar (2), which you can scroll through before capturing the image to select the shooting mode, white balance, exposure value, and color tone (the toolbar is not displayed during focus and image capture). ⢠The image resolution indi cato r (3) indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 3M - Large (2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Med. (1600x1200 resolution), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960 resolution), or MMS 0.3M (640x480 resolution). ⢠The image counter (4) displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during focus and image capture). ⢠The device memory ( ) and memor y card ( ) indicators (5) show where images are saved. Tip! Select Options > Turn icons on to display all viewfinder indicators or Turn icons off to displ ay only the camera status indicators. When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camer a still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zo omed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes in to the battery s avi ng mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue taking pictures, press . After you take the picture, select the following from the toolbar: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete . ⢠To send the video using multimedia, e-mail , Bluetooth connectivity, or infrar ed, press , or select Send . ⢠To capture a new image, select New image . ⢠To print the picture, select Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: Image setup and main settings. To a djust Image setup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you Exit Options
Camera 27 change them again. To cha nge the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Print 3M - Large (2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Med. (1600x1200 resolu tion), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960 resolution), or MMS 0.3M (640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. If you want to print the image, select Print 3M - Large , Print 2M - Med. , or Print 1.3M - Small . If you want to send it through e-mail, select Print 1.3M - Sm all . To send the image through MMS, select MMS 0.3M . These resolutions are only av ailable in the main camera. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pi ctures right away. Extended zoom (main camera only)âÂÂSelect On (continuous) to allow the zoom increments to be smoot h and continuous between digita l and extended digital zoom or On (paused) to allow the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step poin t. If you want to limit the zoom to where the selected image quality is maintained, select Off . Flicker cancellation âÂÂSelect 50Hz or 60Hz . Shutter ton e âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a pi cture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect wh ere to store you r images. Take pictures in a sequence Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the camera to take up to six pictures i n a sequence (if enough memory available), select Options > Sequence mode . To take the pictures, press th e capture key. After you take the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press to open it. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You in the pictureâÂÂself-tim er The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To ac tivate the s elf-timer, s elect Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device be eps
Camera 28 when the timer is runnin g. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. You can also use the se lf-timer in the sequence mode. Tip! Select Options > Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available: Automa tic () , On () , a n d Off () . To switch between the flash modes, press the flash key. Setup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lighting To enable the camera to r e produce colors and lighting more accurately or to add ef fects t o your pictures or videos, scroll through the tool bar, and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂSelect a proper shooting mode for the environment in which you take pictures. Every shooting mode uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a c ertain kind of environmen t. White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reprodu ce colors more accurately. Exposure value (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. The screen display changes to match any settings you make so you see how the chan ge af fects the pictures or vide os. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings apply on ly to the main camera. Independent settings are available for image and video modes, and are retained when switching between the two modes. Shooting modes A shooting mode helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the curr ent environment. Select a proper shooting mode for taking pictures or recording video clips from the shooting mode list. The settings of each shooting mode have been set according to a certain style or environment.
Camera 29 Shooting modes are only ava ilable in the main camera. Scroll through the toolbar, an d select from the video or image shooting modes. When you take pictures, the default shooting mode is Automatic . To make your own shooting mode suitable for a certain environment, select User > Options > Change . I n the user defined shooting mode you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings of another shooting mode, select Based on shooting mode and the desired shooting mode.
Gallery 30 Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery from the Camera application, select Optio ns > Go to Gallery . From Camera , only the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch fr om Galle ry to the camera, in the Images & vide o folder, press the capture key or the camera mode key, or select Options > Go to Camera . Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , P resentatio ns , All files , or Home net. , and press to open it. Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer a pplication. See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 78. You can also create albums; and mark, and add items to albums. See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 35. To open a file, press . Videos open in RealPlayer , and music and soun d clips in Music player . See âÂÂView images and video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. To copy or move files to a compatible memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Move and copy . Select Copy to memory card or Move to memory card Selec t Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory car d (if inserted) are indicated with . Files stored on the device memory are indicated with . To reduce the size of images that you already copied to other locations, such as to a compatible PC, select Options > Transfer and memory > Shrink . To reduce the resolution of an image to 640 x480, select Shrink . To increase free memory space after you have copied items to other locations or devices, select a file and Option s > Transfer and memory > Free memory . See âÂÂBack up filesâÂÂ, p. 43. To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downl. , Video downl. , Track downl. , or Sound downl. . The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from which the site can download. To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, you must firs t create and configure your wireless LAN h ome Internet access point, and then configure the Home n et. application. See âÂÂWireles s LANâ , p. 17.
Gallery 31 The options related to Home net. are not available in Gallery before the settings for Home net. have been configured. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in Images & video in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, through Bluetooth connectivity, or by using infrared. To be able to view a received image or video clip in the gallery or in the media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if insert ed). Open Images & v ideo in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Option s > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂE dit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 33. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 35. To create custom video clip s, select a video clip or several clips in the gallery and Options > Edit . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on your memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Options > Pr int . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. To send a multimedia message to your service provider's media file uploading serv ice (network service), press , and select Upload (if available). Contact your service provider for more informa tion. To view the image, scroll to an image, and press . When the image is opened, to zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . The zooming ratio is at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanent ly. To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Opti ons > Assign > Set as wallpaper . To delete an image or video clip, press . Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. To creat e custom video clips, combine and trim video clips, and add images, sound clips, transitions,
Gallery 32 and effects. Transitions are vi sual effects that you c an add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. You can also use Movie director to create custom video clips. Select the video clips and images you want to create a muvee with and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . See âÂÂMovie direct orâÂÂ, p. 81. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeline. The images, text, and transitions added to a video clip are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit > Video editor . To modif y the vide o, select from the fo llowing opt ions: Edit video clip âÂÂCut, add color effect, use slow motion, mute or unmute sound, move, remove, or duplicate the clip. Edit text (shown only if you added text)âÂÂMove, remove, or duplicate text; change the color and style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text. Edit image (shown only if you added an image)âÂÂMove, remove, or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and set a background or a color effect to the image. Edit sound clip (shown only if you have added a sound clip)âÂÂCut or move t he sound clip, adjust it s length, or remove or duplicate the clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. You can se lect st art transition when the first transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSelec t Video clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound clip . Movie âÂÂPreview the movie in the full screen or as a thumbnail, save or send the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press , and select Take snapshot . To save your vide o, select Opti ons > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Op tions > Settings . The default is the device memory. In Settings , you can also define Default video name , Default sc. shot name , Resolution , and Memory in use .
Gallery 33 To send the video, select Send > Via multime dia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend dataâÂÂ, p. 85. You can also transfer your videos to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, or by using a c ompatible memory card reader enhancement. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or images already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Apply effect to crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a fr ame to the picture. To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Move the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . Th e selected areas form a rectangle that represents the cropped image. If you selected a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press . To move the area within the pictu re, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in or out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, press , , or . Slide show Select Options > Slide show > Start to view images and video clips in the full screen mode. The slid e show starts from the selected file . Select from the following:
Gallery 34 Play âÂÂto open the RealPlayer application, and play a selected video clip Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resu me the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, pres s (previous) or (next). To adjust the tempo of t he slide show, before starting the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between slides . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Music âÂÂSelect On or Off . Track âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. To decrease or increase the v olume during the slide show, press or . TV out mode You can watch videos and images stored in your device on the screen of a compatible TV. Connect a compatible Nokia Video connectivity cable to the video input of a compatible TV. For all applications other than the Images & video folder in Gallery and RealPlayer , the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, the Zoom in option is not available. When image is not zoomed, the opened image is displayed on the TV in full screen. You can view videos and images as a slide show. All items in an album or marked videos and images are displayed o n the TV in full screen while the selected music plays. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealP layer starts playing the video clip on th e device display and the TV screen. See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 78. All audio, including the stereo video clip sound, ringing tone, and key tone, is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video-Out Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. TV out settings must be configured for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See âÂÂTV configurationâÂÂ, p. 114. Presentations With presentations, you can view .svg (sc alable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. These images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view .svg files, select the Pres entations folder, scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press .
Gallery 35 To switch between full screen and nor mal screen, press * . Albums With albums you can conveniently manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums > View albu ms . To add a picture or a video clip to an album i n the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press . To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gallery . Print online With the Print online application you can print images online, and order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mous e pads. The available products depend on the service provider. In order to use Print online, you must subscribe to the service with an online printing s ervice provider and hav e at least one printing service conf iguration file installed. The files can be obtained from prin ting service providers that support Print online . You can only print images that are in jpeg format. 1 Press , and sele ct Gallery > Images & video . Select an image or images, and Options > Print > Order prints . 2 Select a service provider from the list. 3 Select Options and from the following: Open âÂÂto start the connection to the service provider Remove âÂÂto remove the service provider from the list. If you remove the last service provider from the list, the Order prints option is not available until you have at least one configuration file installed. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders: the name of the service provider, total sum, and status of the order. When you are connected to the service provider server, the images preview view opens, and displays the images you selected in Gallery . 4 Select Options and from the following: Preview âÂÂto view the image before ordering a print. Scroll up or down to view the images. Order now âÂÂto submit your order Change product order âÂÂto adjust the product details and number of copies for the selected image. In the product order view, you can select which product and of what type you want to order. The available options and products vary depending on the service provider. Scroll left or right to view and change the image details of the other images in the order.
Gallery 36 Change customer info âÂÂto change the customer and order informa tion. You ca n copy the customer information from contacts. Add image âÂÂto add more images to t he order Remove image âÂÂto remove images from the order Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders. When the order is sent, Order sent success fully is displayed. Online sharing Note: The availability of this service may v ary accordin g to your co untry or sales area . With the Online sharing application, you can share your images and videos in online albums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished pos ts as drafts and con tinue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Get started To use Online sharing , you must subscribe to the serv ice with an online image sharing service provider. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of th e service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see www.nokia.com/support . When you open the service for the first time in th e Online sharing application, you are prompted to provide the user name and password. You can access the settings later through Options > Settings in the Online sharing application. See âÂÂOnline sharing settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. Upload files Press , and select Gallery > Images & vide o , the files you want to upload, and Options > Send > Web upload . You can access the Online shari ng application also from the main camera. The Se lect service view opens. To create a new accoun t to a service, select Options > Add new account or the service icon with the text Create new in the services list. If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . To select a service, press the scroll key. When you select the ser vice, the selected images and videos are shown in the edit state. You can open and view
Gallery 37 the files, reorganize them, add text to them, or add new files. To cancel the web upload process, and save the created post as a draft, select Back > Save as draft . If the uploading has already started, select Canc el > Save as draft . To connect t o the service and upload the files to the web, select Options > Upload , or press . Open online service To view uploaded images and videos in the online service, or draft and sent entries in your device, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Open service . Accoun ts can also be created and modified offline. If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a web browser, and wish to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . Select a service from the list. After you open a serv ice, select from the following: ⢠Open in Web browser âÂÂto connect to the selected service and view the uploaded and draft albums in the web browser. The view may vary depending on the service provider. ⢠Drafts âÂÂto view and edit the draft entr ies, and upload them to the web ⢠Sent âÂÂto view the 20 latest entries created through your device ⢠New post âÂÂto create a new entr y The available options may vary depending on the service provid er. Online shar ing settings To edit the Online sharing settings, in the Online sharing application, select Options > Settings . My accounts In My accounts , you can create new accounts or edit existing accounts. To create a new accoun t, select Options > Add new acco unt . To edit an existing account, select an account and Options > Edit . Select from the following: Account name âÂÂto enter a name for the account Service provider âÂÂto select the service provider you want to use. You cannot change the service provider for an existing account, you must create a new account for the new service provider. If you delete an account in My accounts , the services related to the account are also deleted from you device, including the sent items for the service.
Gallery 38 User name and Password âÂÂto enter the user name and password you created for your account when you registered to the online service Upload image size âÂÂto select the size in which t he images are upload ed to the ser vice Application settings Display im age size âÂÂto select the size in which the image is shown on the display of your device. This setting does not affect the upload image size. Display text size âÂÂto select the font size used to display text in draft and sent entries, or when you add or edit text to a new entry Advanced Service providers âÂÂto view or edit service provider settings, add a new service provider, or view details of a service provider. If you change the service provider, all the My accounts information for the previous service provider is lost. You cannot change the settings of predefin ed servic e provid ers. Default access point âÂÂto change the access point used to connect to the online service, select the access point you want.
Media applications 39 Media applications Music player Press , and select Music player . With the mu sic player, you can play music files and cr eate and listen to playlists . Warning: L isten to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Add music When you open the music player for the f irst time, the player searches the device memory for music fil es to create a music librar y. After you add or remove music files in the device, update your music library. Select Options > Music library > Options > Update Music libr ary . Tip! You can transfer music files from your dev ice to a compatible memory card (if inserted) with Nokia Music Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. Play music When you open the music player, the previously played track or playlist is displayed. To view the music library, select or Options > Music library and the desired song list. To start playing the songs in the view, select Options > Pl ay . When a song is playing, to change between play and pause, press or . To stop a song, press . To fast forward or re wind, press and hold or . To start playing t he next or previous song, press or . To view the currently played song list, select or Options > Open 'Now playing' . To save the song lis t as a playlist, select Opt ions > Add to track lis t , and create a new playlist, or select a saved playlist. To adjust the volume, press or . To modify the tone of music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To select between random play and normal play mode, select Options > Random play . To select whether playing
Media applications 40 stops at the end of the play list or restarts from its beginning, select Options > Loop . To open your web bookmarks for downloading music, select Options > Track downloads . To return to the standby mode and leave the music playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . Music library To view the music l ibrary, select Options > Music library . All tracks lists all music. To view sorted songs, select Albums , Artists , Ge nres , or Compo sers . T he album, artist, genre, and composer informatio n is collect ed from the ID3 or M4A tags of the song files, if avail able. To add songs, albums, artists, genres, or composers to a playlist, select the items and Options > Add to track list . You can create a new playlist or add to an existing one. To view play lists, select Track l ists . To create a new playlist, select Options > New track list . When viewing a playlist you have created yourself, to ad d more songs, select Options > Add tracks . To delete a playlist, press . Deleting a playlist only deletes the playlist, not the music files. Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 83. To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, select Options > Update Mu sic library The requirements of the PC for music transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N93 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.7 or later Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a PC as an external hard drive where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media
Media applications 41 player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite, c onnect the compatible USB cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, press , select Connect. > Data cbl. > Data cable mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been optim ized for transferring music files. For information about tr ansferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the Nokia PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player The functionality of the musi c synchronization may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and helps. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a co mpatible P C, Windows Media Player selects manual synchroniz ation if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a name that is used as the name of your device in Windows Media Player. To transfer manu al selections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected. 2 Drag the songs or albums to the list pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the fil es you want to synchronize and that there is enough free memory on the device. Click Start Sync. to start the synchronization. Automatic synchronization To change the default file transfer option in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select your device, a nd click Se t up Sync. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box. If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you connec t your device, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note t hat your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device memory and the compatible memory card of your device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information.
Media applications 42 The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Image print Use Image print to print your images using a compatible data cable, wireless LAN (if available), Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card (if availab le). You can only print images that are in jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in jpeg forma t. To print images with Image pr int , select the image you want to print and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. To print to a printer compatible with Image print , connect the data cable before you select the print option. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible with Image print using a Nokia conn ectivity cable CA-53, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Options > Prin t settings > Default p rinter . Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery. The selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the la yout, press or through the available layouts for t he selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary, depe nding on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view.
Media applications 43 Back up files To transfer and back up media files from your device to a compatible PC through the wireless LAN, select Options > Transfer and memory > Autom atic transfer . See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. Your device starts a device search. Select a device and a folder to which you want to transfer the media files. Select OK . To change the Storage device or Storage folder se ttings, select Options > Sett ings .
Messaging 44 Messaging Press , and selec t Messag. . In Messag. , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive mes sages and data using Bluet ooth connectivity or infrared, receiv e web service messages, cell broad cast messages, and send service commands. Note: Your d evice may indica te that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate whet her the message is received at the intended de stination. Fo r more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. To create a new message, select New message . Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia mess ages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Messag. contains the following folders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates folder. Mailbox â C o n n e c t t o y o u r r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o r e t r i e v e your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages of f line. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that ha ve not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last 20 messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent usin g Bluetooth connectiv ity or infrared, are stored here. To change the number of messages to be sa ved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 56. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored here. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). Receiving a
Messaging 45 delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, to switch between the folders, press or . To enter and send service requests (also kn own as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service prov ider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messag. . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Option s > Cell broadcast . In the main view, you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. Traditional text input is displayed when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character a ppears. There are more chara cters available for a number k ey th an are printed on the key. ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period) , and enter the letter. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. Predictive text input You can enter any letter with a single keyp ress. Predictiv e text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can add new words. is displayed when you write text using predictive text input. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Predictive text on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device.
Messaging 46 2 To write the desired word, press the ke ys, â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press for N , for o , for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each keypress. 3 When you finish writing the word correctly, press to confirm it, or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found one by one, or press , and select Predictive text > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary , select Spell , enter the word u sing traditional text input, and select OK . The word is ad ded to the dictionary. When the dictio nary is full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Write compound words Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last pa rt of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off To turn predictive text input off for all editors in the device, press , and select Predictive text > Off . Tip! To turn predictive text input on or off, quickly press twice. Tips on text input To insert a number in the letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between the letter and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To delete a character, press . To delete more than one character, press and hold . To use the most common p unctuation marks, press . To open a list of special characters, press and hold . Tip! To insert several specia l charac ters at the same time, press when you select each character.
Messaging 47 Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may va ry, depending on the receiving device. Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settin gs in place. See âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 48 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and one of the following: Text msg. âÂÂto send a text message Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail If you have not set up your e-mail accoun t, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) th at separates the recipients, press . You can al so copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of a multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4 In the message field, write the message. To inser t a template, select Option s > Insert or Insert object > Template . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Imag e , Sou nd clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown. To change the format in which recorded videos are saved, see âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 24. 6 To take a new picture or re cord sound or video fo r a multimedia message, select Insert ne w > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide .
Messaging 48 To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachm ent to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by . Tip! To send other file types as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a sing l e message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or mo re messages. Your service provider may charge accordi ngly. Characters that use accents or other marks, an d characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be se nt in a single message. E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! You ca n combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedi a message, and select Options > Create presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a message from your service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For availability of and subs cription to data services, contact your service provider. Follow the i nstructions given by your service provider. Enter the MM S settings manually 1 Press , and select Tools > Set tings > Con nection > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settings > Multim. msg. > Access point in use and the access point you created as the preferred connection. See also âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an IAP correctly. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. If you select Mailbox in the Messag. m a i n v i e w a n d h a v e n o t s e t u p your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remot e mailbox and internet service provider (ISP).
Messaging 49 InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unre ad text message, an unread multimedia me ssage, data received through infrared, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a m essage, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox , press . To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . To print a text or a multimedia message on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Pri nt . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To star t a packet data connection to re trieve the message to y our device, s elect Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Ob jects . If the message includes a mu ltimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receive many kinds of messages that contain dat a ( ): Configuration me ssage âÂÂYou may receive settings from your service provider or company information management department in a configura tion message. To save the settings, select Options > Save all . Business card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Option s > Save business card . Certifi cates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing tone âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Options > Save . Operat. logo âÂÂTo have the logo shown in the standby mode instead of the servi ce providerâÂÂs own identification, select Option s > Save .
Messaging 50 Calen. entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Option s > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks listed in web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save al l . E-mail notif. âÂÂThe note tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headline s) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability an d subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. See also âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . When you view e-mail messages of fline, your device is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Important: Exercise cau tion when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open conn ection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following:
Messaging 51 New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages Selected âÂÂto ret rieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox To stop retrieving messag es, select Cancel . 2 After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status indicators are as follows: The new e-mail (offline or online mode) has not been retrieved to your device. The new e-mail has been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read, and it has not been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has been read and the message content has been deleted from the device. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieve d and you are offline, you a r e a s k e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e t r i e v e t h i s m e s s a g e f r o m t h e mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and s elect Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options > Retrieve . You can also receive meeting requests in the mailbox. See âÂÂMeeting requestsâÂÂ, p. 74, and âÂÂCreate calendar entriesâÂÂ, p. 74. To print an e-mail message on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connec tivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . Retrieve e-mail messages autom atically To retrieve messages automatically , select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic re trieval > Header retrieval > Always enabled or Only in home net. , and define when and how often the messages are retrieved. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmissi on of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the r emote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove
Messaging 52 the heading as well, you must delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox; th en make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the devic e and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and server . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your device. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-mail from th e device and server, scroll to a n e-mai l that ha s been marked to be deleted during the next conn ection ( ), and select Opti ons > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messag. main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders open s. 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Mu st be defined or with a red asterisk. Follow the instructions given by your servic e provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your serv ice provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select Messag. > Options > Settings > Text msg. and from the following: Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, se lect Reduced support .
Messaging 53 Msg. cen tre in us e âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network sends delivery report s on your mess ages (net work service ). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message center is ab le to convert text mess ages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. Preferred conn. âÂÂSelect the connection used for sending text messages: GSM network or packet data, if supported by the network. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Reply via same ctr. âÂÂSelect whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messag. > Options > Settings > Multimedia message and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of th e image in a multimedia message: Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , or Large . MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. Select Restrict ed ; the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. Access point in use âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message center. Multim edia re trieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Auto. in home network . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your device automa tically makes an a ctive packet dat a connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements.
Messaging 54 Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a deli very report o f a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect whether you want to prevent your device from sending delivery repo rts of received multimedia messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messa g. > Options > Set tings > E-mail and from the following: Mailboxes âÂÂSelect a mailbox to change the following settings: Co nnection se ttings , User settings , Retrieval settings , and Autom atic retrieval . Mailbox in use â Select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox in the mailbox main view. Connection sett ings To edit the settings for the e -mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail serv. âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e- mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an IAP. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name f or the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you use the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not upda ted automatically when you are online. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection.
Messaging 55 APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the fol lowing: My e-mail addres s âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail serv. âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends yo ur e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service pro vider for m ore info rmation. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an IAP. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. The settings for User n ame , Password, Security (ports) , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mai l . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-m ail address . Include signatur e âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail alerts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone and a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox. Default encoding âÂÂSelect another encodi ng according to language. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the f older path for folde rs to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂSubscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval Header re trieval âÂÂSelect whethe r you want the device to retrieve new e-mail automatically. You can define when, and how often, the me ssages are retrieved.
Messaging 56 Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmissio n charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Optio ns > Settings > Service message . Select whether yo u want to receive service messag es. If you wa nt to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a s ervice message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topic s and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Sett ings > Cell broadcast and from the following: Reception âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new top ic numbers, and saves the new numbers with out a name to the topic lis t. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Setting s > Other and from the following: Save sent me ssages âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Se nt folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is reached, t he oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂIf a compatible memory c ard is inserted in the device, select Phone memory or Memory card to save your messages.
Make calls 57 Make calls Voice calls Tip! T o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e t h e v o l u m e d u r i n g a c a l l , press or . If you have set th e volume to Mu te , you can still adjust the volume with the or keys. You can make voice calls in the fold-open mo de and view mode. See âÂÂModesâÂÂ, p. 11. 1 To start a voice call, with the fold open, enter the phone number in the standby mode , including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press or close the cover to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press . Select the call type Voice call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before yo u can make a call this way. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 68. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold in the standby mode. See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 112. Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Chan ge number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialed number in the standby mode, press . Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number. Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participa nt in the conf erence call, se lect Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conference > Add to conference .
Make calls 58 Your device supports conf erence calls between a maximum of six participants, including y ourself. To have a private conversation with one of th e participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private. The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still continue the conference call. When you finish the private conversation, select Options > Ad d to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a partic ipant, select Op tions > Co nferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a pho ne number To activate speed d ialing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Spd. dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice; you do not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for th e entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag fo r a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should n ot rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold . If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the headset key to sta rt voice dia ling.
Make calls 59 2 A short to ne is played, an d Speak now is displaye d. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel vo ice dialing. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home), Mo bile (business) , Teleph one , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (busi ness) . Video calls You can make video calls in the fold-open mode and view mode. See âÂÂModesâÂÂ, p. 11. For hands-free video calls, use the view mode. When you make a video call, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to th e video call recip ient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while there is another voice, video, or data call active. Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, p. 105. 1 To start a video call, with the fold open, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Video call . If you want to make a hands-free video call, activate the view mode after the call recipient has answer ed the call. Starting a v ideo call may ta ke a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible) you are asked if yo u want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video imag es, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call
Make calls 60 recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sound and may s ee a still image or a grey background graphic. Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Enable or Disable > Sending video , Sending audio , or Sending audio & video . To zoom your own image, select Zoom in or Zoom out . The zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. To switch the places of the se nt and received video images on the display, select Change image order . Even if you hav e denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video c all. Check the pricing with your service provider. To end the video call, press . Video sharing Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. Simply invite a recipient to view the live vi deo, or a video clip you want to share. Sharing begins auto matically when the recipient accepts the invitation, and yo u activate the correct mode. See âÂÂShare videoâÂÂ, p. 61. Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a 3G UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your service provider for questions about network availability and fees asso ciated with using this application. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that Video sh aring is installed on your Nokia N93. ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p.61. ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 61. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UTMS network. If you invite someone to a sharing ses sion and that personâÂÂs phone is turned off, or the person is not wi thin UMTS network coverage, they do not know that you are sending an invitation. However, you receive an error message th at the recipient cannot accept the invitation.
Make calls 61 Settings Person-to-person connection setti ngs A person-to-person connection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Setting up a SIP profile allows you to establish a live person-to-pe rson connection to another compatible phone. The SIP prof ile must also be established to receive a sharing session. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air. If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on your contact ca rd for that pers on. Open Con tacts from your device main menu, and open the contact ca rd (or start a new card fo r that person) . Select Opt ions > Add detail > SIP . Enter the SIP address in the format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). UTMS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your serv ice provider to estab lish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Share video To receive a sharing session, the rec ipient must install Video sharing and configure th e required settings on their mobile device. You and the recipient must both be registered to the service before you can start sharing. To receive share invitations, you must be registered to the service, have an active UMTS connection, and be within the UMTS network coverage. Live video 1 When a voice call is activ e, select Opt ions > Share video > Live . 2 The device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select t he SIP address to which you want to send the invi tation, an d Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the recipient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation.
Make calls 62 The loudspeaker is acti ve. You can also use a compatible headset to continue your voice call while you share live video. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. 5 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Clip . A list of video clips opens. 2 Select a video clip you want to share. A preview view opens. To preview the clip, select Option s > Play . 3 Select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a s uitable format to be able to sha re it. Clip must be convert ed for sharing. Continue? appears. Select OK . The device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the re cipient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 4 Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitatio n. 5 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Options > Continue to resume sharing. 6 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a shar e invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you ar e not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation, you c an select: Accept âÂÂto begin the sharing session. If the sender wants to share live video, activate the view mode. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . If you shar e a video clip, select Exit . Video sharing ended is displayed.
Make calls 63 Answer or reject a call To answer the call in the fold-open mode, press . If Answer if fo ld opened is set to On , to answer a call in the fold-closed mode, open the fold, and the call starts automatically. Otherwise, open the fold, and press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not want to answer a c all, in the fold-open mode, press to reject it. The caller hears a line busy tone. If you have activated the Call diver t > If busy function to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 112. When you reject an incoming call with the fold open, you can also send a text mess age to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send msg. . You can edit the text before se nding it. To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, p. 105. Answer or reje ct a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Tip! You can assign a ringing ton e for video calls. Press and select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Personalise > Video cal l tone . In the fold-open mode, press to answer the video call. To start sending video, activate the v iew mode, and a live video image, recorded video clip, or the image being captured by the camera in your device is shown to the caller. If you want to send a live video image, turn the camera unit to the direction fr om which you want to send the video image. If you do not activate the view mode, video sending is not possible, but you can still hear the other person. A grey screen is shown in place of the video. To replace the grey screen with a still image, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 105. Even if y ou have deni ed video sen ding during a video ca ll, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provi der. To end the video call, in the view mode or with the fold open, press . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting .
Make calls 64 To answer the waiting call, pr ess . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, select Swap . Select Options > Tr ansfer to connect an incoming c all or a call on hold with an active cal l and to disconnect yourself from the calls. To end the ac tive call, press . To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Options during a voice call Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Sele ct Options during a call for the available options on your device, including the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send MMS (in UMTS networks only)âÂÂTo send an image or a video in a multimedia messa ge to the other participant of the call. Yo u can edit the m essage a nd change th e recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device. Send DTMF âÂÂTo send DTMF tone strings, for example, a password. Enter the DTMF stri ng or se arch for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Options during a video call Select Options during a video call for the following options: Enable or Disable (audio in the fold-open mode; video, audio, or both in view mode). Activate hand set (if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached) . Activate hand sfree (fold-open mode only, and if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached ). End active call Change image order Zoom in or Zoom out (view mode only). Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent
Make calls 65 calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports thes e functions, the device i s switched on, and within the network ser vice area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear rec ent calls in the recent calls main vi ew. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to er ase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, an d press . Call duration To monitor the approximate dura tion of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration . To set the display o f the call duration while a c all is active, select Connect. > Log > Options > Sett ings > Show call duration > Yes or No . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on netw ork features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Optio ns > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code; see âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 109. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connectio ns, press , a nd select My own > Log > Packet data . For example, you ma y be charged for your packet da ta connections by the amount o f data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incom ing Outgoing Missed communica tion events
Make calls 66 To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press to select the general log. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! To see the duration of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Mess aging > Sent . Su be v en t s, s uc h as a te x t m es s ag e se nt i n mo re t ha n on e part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes t o co n fi r m. To r e mo v e a s in g le ev e nt from the log, press . To set the Log duration , select Options > Sett ings > Log duration . The log events remain in the device me mory for a set number of days after wh ic h they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regi ster, and messaging delivery report s are permane ntly delete d. To view the details of a communication event, in the general log view, scroll to an even t, and press . Tip! In the details view, to copy a phone number to the clipboard, select Option s > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connection timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is transferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Contacts (phonebook) 67 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a co ntact card. You can also create contact group s, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. You can add received contact information (business cards) to contacts. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contact ca rds in Contacts , scroll to the contact card you wa nt to edit, and select Options > Edit . Tip! To print contact ca rds on a compatible basi c print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluet ooth connectivity (such as HP De skjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit contact card s, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. To attach a small thum bnail image to a contact c ard, open the contact card, and se lect Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Tip! Speed dialing is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialing keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 58. Tip! To send contact informat ion, se lect the card yo u want to send. Select Options > Se nd > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . See âÂÂMe ssagingâÂÂ, p. 44 and âÂÂSend dataâÂÂ, p. 85. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group: (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 69. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Contacts info .
Contacts (phonebook) 68 Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a conta ct card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a messag e to the contact to a certain n umber or address. The default number is also used in voice dialing. 1 In the address book, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM dir ectory . Select t he names you want to copy and Opt ions > Copy to Con tacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, press , and select Contacts . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. SIM directory and services For availability and information on using SIM card serv ices, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see th e names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls fro m your devic e to selected phone numbers, select Op tions > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 69 When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the caller âÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call an d your device recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the gro ups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing to nes. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group N , and select O K . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a gr oup, sele ct Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from g roup . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Services 70 Services Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible h ypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext mar kup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Press , and select Services . Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in the standby mode. Web access point To access pages, you need web service settings for the page that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the web page. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For more information, contact your service provider. Tip! Settings may be available on the website of your service provider. Enter settings ma nually 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the sett ings for an access point. Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Press , and select Services > Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmar k . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the current access point. 3 To set the created access poi nt as the default access point, select Options > Se ttings > Access point . Bookmarks view The bookmarks view op ens when you open Services . Your device may have some bookmarks loa ded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for sec uri ty or content, as you would with any internet site. indicates the starting pa ge defined for the default access point.
Services 71 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the d ata transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the reque sted re source is stored) is secu re. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryption status, and information about server and user authentication. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. For mo re information , contact your service provider. See al so âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 110. Browse Im portant : Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protecti on against harmful software. To download a page, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ). On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border a round them. To open links and make selections, press . Shortcut: Press to jump to the end of a page, and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous page while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to v iew a chronological list of the pages you visited during a browsing session. To retrieve the latest content from the ser ver, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Sav e as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold . To return to the browser view, select Options > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Optio ns > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or a co mpatible memory card (if inserted), and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Option s > Navigation options > Go to web address .
Services 72 You can download files th at cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ring ing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. To download an item, scroll to the link, and pres s . When you start a download, a list of ongoing, paused, and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To view the list, select Options > Tools > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to pause, resume, or cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. 1 To download the item, scro ll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . End a connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect , or to end the connection and cl ose the browser, select Options > Exit . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory locati on that is us ed to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have
Services 73 accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Advanced o ptions > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by yo ur service provider, and you may not be able to change, cr eate, edit, or remove them. Load imgs. & sounds âÂÂSelect whether you want to load images while browsing. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Sh ow images . Font size âÂÂSelect the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characters are not shown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language. Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂSelect what is shown when you are browsing: Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Search page âÂÂDefine a web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sound s embedded on web pages, select a v olume level. Rendering âÂÂIf you wa nt the page layout shown as accurately as possible when in the Small screen mode, select By quali ty . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Java/ECM A script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show security notifications. Conf. DTMF sendi ng âÂÂSelect whether you want to confirm before the device sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂOptions during a voice callâÂÂ, p. 64.
Calendar 74 Calendar Use Calendar to remind you of meetings, anniversaries, and to keep track of your tasks and other notes. Create calendar entries Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters you ente r are added to the Subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and one of the following: Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Meeting request âÂÂto send a meeting request by e-mail (a mailbox must be defined in the device) Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthd ays or special dates (entries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fields. T o set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm time and Alarm date . To add a description for an appointment or a meeting, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . When the calendar alar ms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. Th e reminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to s nooze, sel ect Snooz e . Tip! You can synchronize your calendar with a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. When creating a calendar entr y, set the desire d Synchronisation option. Meeting requests If you receive a meeting request to the mailbox in your device, the request is saved to the calendar when you open the e-mail.
Calendar 75 You can view received meeting requests in the mailbox or in the calendar. To respond to a meeting request using e-mail, select Options > Respond: . Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle in the bottom right corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 a.m. To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today , press . To send a cale ndar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . To print calendar entries on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with B luetooth connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150 ), select Options > Print . Manage your calendar entries Deleting past entries in Calendar save s space in your device memory. To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All ent ries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . Calendar settings To modify Calend ar alarm ton e , Default view , Week starts on , and Week vi ew title , select Options > Settings .
My own 76 My own Visual Radio You can use Visual Radio (network service) as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations. If you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service, you can view visual information on the display related to the radi o program. The Visual Radio service uses packet data (net work service). You can listen to the FM radio w hile using other applications. To use the Visual Radio servic e, the following conditions are required: ⢠The device must be switched on. ⢠The device must have a valid SIM card inserted. ⢠The station you listen to and the network operator or the wireless service provider you use must support this service. ⢠An internet access point must be defined to access the service providerâÂÂs Visual Radio server. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. ⢠The station must have the correct Visual Radio service ID defined and Visual Radio service enabled. See âÂÂSaved stationsâÂÂ, p. 78. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio ser vice, the operators and radio st ations in your area may not support Visual Radio. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device f or the FM radio to function properly. You can listen to the radio with the built-in loudspeaker or a compatible headset. When using the loudspeake r, keep the headset plugged in the device. The lead of the headset functions as the antenna of the radio, so let it hang freely . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuo us exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device nea r your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, the radio is turned back on. The radio selects the used frequency band base d on the country inform ation received from the network.
My own 77 Visual Radio can be used for listening when the device cover is closed. Channel information may be displayed on the cover display. To mute or unmute the radio, press . Listen to the radio Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio stat ion in that particul ar area. Connect a compatible headset to the device. The lead of the headset functions as the radi o antenna, so let it hang freely. Press , and select My own > Radio . To start a station se arch, select or . Searching stops when a station is found. T o change the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, select or to go to the next or previous saved station. T o select the memory location of a stat ion, press the corresponding number key. To adjust the volume, press or . To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Optio ns > Acti vate loudspea ker . To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Option s > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > St ations . See âÂÂSaved stationsâÂÂ, p. 78. To return to the standby mode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Option s > Play in background , or press . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. To view available visual conten t for a tuned station, select , or in the stations view, select Options > Station > Start visual servic e . If the visual service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrie ve to search for it in the station dire ctory (network service). When the connection to the vi sual service is established, the display shows the current visual content designed by the content provider.
My own 78 To adjust di splay setting s fo r the visual content view, select Options > Display sett ings > Lighting or Power saver time-out . Saved stations You can save up to 20 r adio stations in Visual Radio. To open your station list, select Options > Statio ns . To listen to a saved station, selec t Options > Station > Listen . To vi ew available v isual conten t for a statio n with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂTo select whether a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start service âÂÂTo have the Visual Radio service start automatica lly when you select a saved station that offers visual serv ice, select Yes . Access point âÂÂTo select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an a ccess point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. RealPlayer Press , and select My own > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play video clips or s tream media files over the air. You can ac tivate a streaming link when you browse web pages, or store it in the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted). Tip! You can also view video clips or streaming links in your device with other compatible UPnP devices, such as a TV or a PC, through wireless LAN. See â View media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all th e variatio ns of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may in clude content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this de vice. Play video clips 1 To play a media file stored in device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted), select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer
My own 79 Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the fi le. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to nor mal screen mode. Shortcuts during play are as follows: ⢠To fast forward, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the media file, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an IAP for your default access point. Ot her se rvice provid ers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be configured when you first sta rt your device. Contact your service pro vider for m ore info rmation. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer recognizes an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or re ceived in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a spec ial text message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For more information, co ntact your service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and fro m the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player automatically repeat video clips after they fini sh playing Connection âÂÂto select wh ether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy sett. : Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server. Glossary : Proxy servers are inte rmediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers
My own 80 use them to provide additional security or speed up access to browser pages th at contain sound or video clips. Netw. se tt. â â¢ Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the internet, and press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you pause a media clip playing through a network link. Select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the serverâÂÂs port range. The minimum va lue is 1024. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the serverâÂÂs port range. The maximum value is 65535. Select Options > Advanced settings to edit th e bandwidth values for different networks. Flash Player With Flash Player, you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mob ile devices. Organize flash files Press , and select My own > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flas h file, scr oll to it, and press . To send a flash file to a compatible device, scroll to it, and press . To copy a flash fi le to another folder, select Organise > Copy to folder . To move a flash file to another folder, s elect Organise > Move to folder To create a folder to organize your flash files, select Organise > New folder . The available options may vary. To delete a flash file, scroll to it, and press . Play flash files Press , and select My own > Flash Player . Scrol l to a flash file, and pres s . Select Options and from the following: Pause âÂÂPause the playback Stop âÂÂStop the playback Volume âÂÂAdjust the playback vo lume. To increase or decrease the volume scroll left or right
My own 81 Quality âÂÂSelect the playback quality. If the playback appears uneven and slow, change the Quality setting to Normal or Low . Full screen âÂÂPlay the file using the entire display. To return to the normal scr een, select Normal screen . Even though not visible in full scre en, the key functions may still be available when you press either key below the display. Fit to screen âÂÂPlay the file in its original size after zooming it Pan mode on âÂÂMove around the display with the scroll key when you have zoomed in The available options may vary. Movie director Press , and select My own > Movie , or launch it from the gallery. Muvees are styled video clips that can contain videos, images, music, and text. The style determines the transitions, visual effects, graphics, music, and text that are used in the muvee. Create muvees 1 In the Movie director main view, select the videos and images with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Create muv ee ; or open the Images & video folder in Gallery . Select the video clips and images you with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. Movie director uses the music and text associated with the chosen style. 3 Select Create muvee . The muvee is created automatically, and a Previe w view is displayed. You can select Save to save the muvee in the Gallery, Recreate to shuffle the media files and create a new muvee, or Back to select a different style for your muvee. You can also select Customise to change the muvee settings and create a custom muvee to which you can add images, music, and text. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie directo r main view, select the videos and images with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Create mu vee ; or select the Images & video folder in Gallery . Select the videos and images with which you want to cr eate a muvee, and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. In the style view, select Option s > Customis e and from the following: Videos & Images âÂÂselect from the following:
My own 82 ⢠Add/Remove âÂÂAdd or remove video clips and images or Add/Remove > Capture to open the camera application to capture new video clips and images ⢠Move âÂÂReorder the position of video clips and images in the custom muvee ⢠Select contents âÂÂSelect video segments to include or exclude in the muvee Length âÂÂto define the duration of the muvee, select User defined . Se lect Multim edia mes sage , Same as music or Auto-select . If the mu vee duration is less than the music duration, th e muvee is repeated to match the music duration. If the muvee duration is longer than the music duration, the music is repeated to match the muvee duration. Music âÂÂto select a music clip from the list. Message âÂÂto edit the Opening message and Closing message . Settings âÂÂto change the settings for muvee production. Select from the following: ⢠Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees ⢠Resolutio n âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees ⢠Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees 3 Select Create muvee . The muvee is created automatically, and Preview displayed. You can select Save to save the muvee in the gallery, Recreate to shuffle the media file s and create a new muvee, or Customise to return to the muvee settings. Games Press , and select My own and a game. For instructions on how to play the game, select Options > Help .
Connectivity 83 Connectivity PC connections You need to connect your de vi ce t o a c o m p a ti b l e P C t o do the following: ⢠Transfer information between Nokia PC Suite applications and your device. For example, to synchronize calendar appointments or transfer images. ⢠Use your device as a modem to connect to network services such as the internet. You can connect your device and a compatible PC via a compatible USB or serial cable, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Detailed installation instructions can be found in th e user guide for Nokia PC Suite. Tip! When using Nokia PC Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use the Get Connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite. Data cable Press , and select Connect. > Data cbl. > Media player , PC Suite , Mass storage , or Image pr int . To ha ve the device ask the purpose of the connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection . Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with wireless Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as headse ts and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, v ideo clips, music and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); and connect to a compatible printer to p rint images with Image pr int . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Since devi ces with Bluet oot h technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only
Connectivity 84 need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of ea ch other, but the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specifi cation 2.0 supporting the following profile s: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a service or a function, and defines how different devices connect. For example, the Hands-Free Profile is used between the handsfree device and the phone. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 109 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. After you set Bluetooth connectivity on and change My phone's vi sibility to Shown to all , your dev ice and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. Select from the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSelect On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, firs t set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. My phone's visibi lity âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Blueto oth technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name of your device. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancemen t, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On .
Connectivity 85 Remote SIM mo de To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Before the mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated fr om the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your Nokia device, Remote SI M is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless ne twork is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card serv ices or features requiring cellular network coverage. However, a wireless LAN connection remains active during the remote SIM mode. Warning: In the remote SIM mode, you cannot make or receiv e any calls with your device, exc ept make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require networ k coverage. To make calls, you must first exi t the remo te SIM mode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code. To exit the remote SIM mode, press , and select Exit rem. SIM mode . Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibili ty > Hidden . In this way, you can better cont rol who can find your device with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connectivity indicators ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth connectiv ity is on. ⢠When is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect with another device. ⢠When is shown c ontinuo usly, data is being transmit ted using Blue tooth conn ectivity. 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery .
Connectivity 86 2 Select the item and Options > Se nd > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth technology within range st art to appear on the display. Device icons are: co mputer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrup t the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in Messag. does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To open the paired devices view ( ), in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The pa sscode is use d only once. To pair with a device, select Option s > New paired device . Devices with wireless Bluetoot h technology within range start to appear on the display. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same pass c ode must be entered on the other device as well. After pair ing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorized or una uthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Tip! If you are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is switched off.
Connectivity 87 Receive data When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag. . Messages received through Bluetooth connect ivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 49. Switch off To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . Infrared connection With infrared, you can transf er data su ch as busine ss cards, calendar notes, and me dia files with a compatible device. Do not point the infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to in terfere with other IR devi ces. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive data using infrared 1 Ensure that the infrar ed ports of the sending and receiving devices are poin ting at each other, and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is up to 1 meter (3 feet). 2 The user of the receiving de vice activates the infrared port. To activate the infrared port of your device to receive data through infrared, press , and select Connect. > Infrar ed . 3 The user of the sending device selects t he desired infrared function to st art the data transfer. To send data through infra red, locate the desired file in an application or the f ile manager, and select Options > Se nd > Via infrared . If data transfer is not star ted within 1 minute after the activation of the infrared port , the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . New infrared messages are indic ated by . When blinks, your device is trying to c onnect to the other device or a connection has been lost. When is shown continuously, the infrared connection is active, and yo ur device is ready to send a nd receive data using its infrared port.
Connectivity 88 Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP. Using a wireless LAN access point device or a wireless LAN router, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support wireless LAN to the network, such a s your Nokia dev ice, a compatible PC , a compatible printer, and a c ompatible sound system or a TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. Using the wireless LAN functi on of the Nokia N93 in a home network requires a wo rking wire less LAN home connection setup and the other target home devices to be UPnP enabled and to be connected to the same home network. The home network uses the sec urity settings of the wireless LAN connection. Use the home network feature in a wireless LAN infrastruct ure network with a wireless LAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To manage the settings for Home net. , press , and select Connect. > Home net. You can also use t he home network to view, play, copy, or print compatible media files from Gallery . See âÂÂView media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. Important: Always use one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection and reduce the risk of unauthorize access to your data. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another device, or in Gallery , select the option to view, play , print, or copy media files on your Nokia device or search for other devices in the Home net. folder. Important security information When you co nfigure your wir eless LAN ho me network, enable an encryption method, first on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to c onnect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a s afe place separate from the devices. To view or change th e setting s of the wireless LAN Internet access point in your Nokia de vice, see âÂÂAccess poi ntsâÂÂ, p. 106. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the Internet access point. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joinin g the ad hoc network.
Connectivity 89 Your device notifies you if another device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use wireless LAN in a network that doe s not have encrypti on, switch off sharin g Nokia N93 files with other devices, or do not share any pr ivate media files. To change sharing settings, see âÂÂHome network settingsâÂÂ, p. 89. UPnP wizard When you access the home network application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, and helps you to define the home network settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the home network main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the Home Media Server software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. Home network settings To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through a wireless LAN, you must create and configure your wireless LAN home IAP; then configure Home net. . See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. The options related to Ho me net. are not available in Gallery before the settings for Home net. have been configured. Configure sett ings To configure Home net. , select Connect. > Home net . > Settings and from the following: Home acces s point âÂÂSelect Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, Us er defined to select your home Internet access point that is used automatically when you use Home net. , or None . If your home network does not have wireless LAN security settings ena bled, you get a security warning. You ca n continue and switch on the wireless LAN security late r; or cancel defining the access point, and first switch on the wireless LAN security. See Wireless LAN in âÂÂAcce ss pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network. Set sharing on and define content Select Connect. > Home net. > Share content . Content sharin g âÂÂAllow or deny sharin g media file s with compatible devices. Important: Do not set Content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set Content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in
Connectivity 90 the home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & video and Music folders. To select media files for sharing with ot her devices from the Images & video and Music folders or to view the sharing status of Images & video or Music , select Share content . View media files To connect a compatible PC to the home network, you must install the related so ftware from th e DVD-ROM supplie d with your Nokia devi ce. If Content sharing is on in your device, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can v iew and copy the media files you ha ve selected to share in Share content . If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set Content sh aring off. Even if Conten t sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in anot her home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Media files stored in your device To select images, videos, and sound clips stored in your device and show them in an other home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Gallery , select an image, a video clip, or a sound clip. 2 Select Options > Show via h ome net. 3 Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your devi ce, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. Media files stored in th e other device To select media files that are stored on another home network device and show them in your device (or in a compatible TV), do the following: 1 In Gallery , select Home net. . Your device starts the search of ot her compatible de vices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2 Select a device from the list. 3 Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device. 4 Select the image, video clip, or music clip you want to view, and select Option s > Show via home net. (images and video) or Play via home network (music). 5 Select the device in which the file is shown. To stop sharing the media file, select Options > Stop showing . To print images saved i n Gallery through Home net. with a UPnP compatible printer, select the print option in
Connectivity 91 Gallery . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Content sharin g does not have to be switched on. To search f iles with di fferent criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . Copy media files To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Organise > Co py to home network or Move to home network . Content shar ing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files fr om the other device to your device, select a file in the other device, and Option s > Copy to phone mem. or Copy to memory card (the name of the memory card if a compatible memory card is available). Content sh aring does not have to be switched on. Synchronization Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables yo u to synchronize your notes, calendar , contacts, or e-mail with various compatible calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You can also create or edit synchronization settings. The synchronization applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchron ization. For info rmation on Syn cML compatibility, contact the supplier of the application with which you want to synchronize your device data. You may receive synchron ization settings in a special text message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Synchronize data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. 1 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronizat ion is shown on the display. To cancel synchronization be fore it finish es, select Cancel . 2 You are notified when the sy nchronization is complete. Select Yes to view the log file showing the synchronization status and how many entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronized) in your device or on the server. Connection manager Press , and s elect Conne ct. > Conn. mgr. . To view the status of data connections or end connections in GSM a nd
Connectivity 92 UMTS network and wireless LAN, select Act. data conn . . To search for wirel ess LANs av ailable within range, select Availab. WLAN . Data connections In the active connections view, you can see the open data connections: data calls ( ), packet data connections ( or ), and wireless LAN connections ( ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depend ing on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Wireless LAN The available wireless LAN view shows a list of wireless LANs within range, their network mode ( Infrastructure or Ad-hoc ), and si gnal strength indica tor. is shown for networks with encryption, and if your device has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . Create an Internet acce ss point 1 Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. > Availab. WLAN . 2 The device searches for wire less LANs within range. Scroll to the network in which you want to create an Internet access p oint, and select Options > Define access point . 3 The device creates an Intern et acc ess point with d efault settings. To view or change these settings, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Device manager Press , and select Connect. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and di fferent configur ation settings from your service provider, or company information management department. Thes e configuration settings may include access point settin gs for data connections and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect t o a server and rece ive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from service providers, select Options > Enable config. or Disable config. .
Connectivity 93 Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂE nter a password to identify your device to the server. Session mode âÂÂSelect the connection type that is used to connect to the server: Blueto oth or Internet . Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, se lect Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before accepting a configuration from the server, select No . Network authentic. âÂÂSelect if netw ork authentication is used. Modem Press , and select Connect. > Modem . To connect your device to a compatible PC through infrared, to use it as a modem, press . For how to conn ect the devices, see âÂÂInfrared connectionâÂÂ, p. 87
Office 94 Office Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Office > Recorder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Converter To convert measures from one unit to another, press , and select Office > Converter . Converter has limited accur acy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Unit f ield, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field chan ges automatically to show the converted value. Base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exc hange rates are cleared. Calculator To add, subtract, multiply, divide, and calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited ac curacy and is designed for simple calculatio ns.
Office 95 Notes To write notes, press , and select Office > Notes . You can send notes to compati ble devices, and sa ve plain text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . To print a note on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetoot h connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . Zip manager Use the Zip manager application to compress files. Compressed files use less memory and are more convenient to e-mail. To open Zip manager, press , and select Office > Zip . You can perform the following tasks using Zip manager: ⢠Create new archiveâÂÂCreate a new archive file to store compressed ZIP formatted files ⢠Update an archiveâÂÂAdd sing le or multiplecompressed files or directories to an existing archiv e. ⢠Delete filesâÂÂDelete files or directories from an existing archive. ⢠Archive passwordâÂÂSet, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives . ⢠Zip manager settingsâÂÂChange the fol lowing settings: Compession l evel and Include subfolders . You can store archive files on the device or on a compatible memory card. Quickoffice To use the Quickoffice applications, press , and select Office > Quickoffice . A list of files in the .doc, .xls, .ppt, and .txt file formats saved in your device opens. To open a file in its respective application, press . To sort files, select Op tions > Sort files . To open Quickword , Quicksheet , or Quickpoint , press to reach the desired view. Quickword With Quickword , you can view native Microsoft Word documents on the display of your device. Quickword supports colors, bold, ital ics, and underline. Quickword supports the viewing of documents saved in .doc format in Micros oft Wo rd 97 or later. Not all
Office 96 variations or fe atures of the mentioned file formats are supported. See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View Word documents To move in the document, use the scroll key. To search the document for text, select Op tions > Find . You can also select Opt ions and from the following: Go to âÂÂto move to t he start, end, or selected position within the document Zoom âÂÂto zoom in or out Start auto-scroll âÂÂto start automatic scrolling throug h the document. To stop scrolling, press . Quicksheet With Quicksheet , you can read Microsoft Excel files on the display of your device. Quicksh eet supports the viewing of spreadsheet files saved in .xls format in Micros oft Excel 97 or later. Not all variations or fe atures of the mentioned file formats are supported. See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View spreadsheets To move around in the spreadsheet, use the scroll key. To switch between worksheets, select Options > Worksheet . To search the speadsheet for a text within a value or formula, select Options > Find . To change how the spreadsheet is displayed, select Options and from the following: Pan âÂÂto navigate within the current worksheet by blocks. A block contains columns and rows displayed by a screen. To display the columns and rows, select a block and OK . Zoom âÂÂto zoom in or out Freeze panes âÂÂto keep the highlighted row, column, or both visible while you move in the spreadsheet Resize âÂÂto adjust the size of columns or rows Quickpoint With Quickpoint , you can view Microsoft PowerPoint presentations on the display of your device. Quickpoint supports the viewing of present ations created in .ppt format in Micro soft Po werPoint 97 or later. Not all variations or features of th e mentioned file formats are supported.
Office 97 See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View presentations To move between the slide, outline, and the notes view, press or . To move to the next or pre vious slide in the presentation, press or . To view the presentation in full screen, select Options > Full screen . To expand items in the presenta tion outline in the outline view, select Options > Expand . More information If you experience problems with Quickword , Quicksheet , or Quickpoint , visit www.quickoffice.com for more information. Support is also available by sending an e-mail to supportS60@quickoffice.com. Adobe reader With Adobe Reader you can read PDF docum ents on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for PDF document content on handsets and other mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions. To access and open documents: â¢P r e s s , a n d s e l e c t Office > Adobe PDF . Select Options > Browse for file to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on a compatible memory card. ⢠Open an e-mail attachment from received e-mail messages (network service). ⢠Send a document using Bluetooth connectivity to your Inbox in Messag. . â¢U s e File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on the me mory card. ⢠B r o w s e w e b p a g e s . E n s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s s e t u p w i t h a n Internet access point before browsing. For more information on access points, see the user guide for your device. Manage PDF files To browse and manage PDF files, press , and select Office > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . You can also select Options and from the following:
Office 98 Browse fo r file âÂÂto browse for PDF files in the device memory or on a compatible memory car d. Settings âÂÂto modify default zoom level and viewing mode of PDF documents. View PDF files When a PDF file is open, select Options and one of the following: Zoom âÂÂto zoom in, out, or to a selected percentage. You can also resize the document to the screen width, or fit the whole PDF page to the screen. Find âÂÂto search the document for a text. View âÂÂto view the document in full screen. You can also rotate the PDF document by 90 degrees in either direction. Go to âÂÂto move to a selected page, next page, previous page, first page, or last page. Save âÂÂto save the file to device memory or a compatible memory card. Settings âÂÂto modify default zoom level and default viewing mode. Details âÂÂto display the properties of the PDF document. More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com . To share questions, suggestions, and information about the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://adobe.com/suppor t/forums/main.html . Barcode reader Use the Barcode application to decode different types of codes (for example, b arcodes and codes in magazines). The codes may contai n informat ion such as URL links, e-mail addresses, and phone numbers. To scan and decode barcodes, press , and select Office > Barcode . To scan a code, select Scan code . Set the code between the red lines on the display. The Barcod e scans and decodes the code, and the decoded information appears on the display. To save the scanned data, selec t Options > Save . The dat a is saved in .bcr format. To view saved decoded information, in the main view, select Saved data . To open a code, press . When viewing the decoded info rmation, the different links, URL links, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses, are
Office 99 indicated by icons on the top of t he display in the direction they appear in the decoded information. Select Saved data > Options and from the following: Scan new code âÂÂto scan a new code Open link âÂÂto open a URL link Add to bookmarks âÂÂto save a URL link to the bookmarks in Web Create message âÂÂto send a text message or an e-mail to a phone number or an e-mail address Add to Contacts âÂÂto add a phone number, e-mail address, or URL address to Contacts Call âÂÂto call a phone number. The available options may vary depending on the highlighted link. The device goes into the standby mode to sav e battery power if Barcode cannot be activated or if no keys are pressed for 1 minute. To continue scanning or viewing saved informa tion, press .
Personalize your device 100 Personalize your device Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured for your service provider. This configuration may incl ude changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more in formation. ⢠To use the standby d isplay for fast access to your mos t frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver, see âÂÂChange the look of your devic eâÂÂ, p. 101. ⢠To customize the ringing tones, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 100 and âÂÂAdd ringing to nes for contactsâÂÂ, p. 69. ⢠To chang e the short cuts assigned to , and in the standby mode , see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 104. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mod e, press , and select Clock > Options > Set tings > Cl ock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > General > Welcome note / logo . ⢠To change the main menu view, in th e main menu, select Options > Change view > Grid or List . ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folde r . You can move less used applications into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, pres s in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise .
Personalize your device 101 Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. To stop the sound, press any key. When you choose a tone, Tone download s opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start a connection to a web page to download tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be said when your device rings, select Options > Personalise > Say caller's name > On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevente d. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make calls, you must change profiles to activate the phone function. If th e device has been locked, enter the lock code. Warning: Your device must be switched on to use offline profile. Do not switch the d evice on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN (if available), for example, to re ad your e-mail or browse on the internet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. To exit the offline profile, press , and select another profile. The device reenable s wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficie nt signal strength). If a Bluetooth connection is activa ted before using the offline profile, it is deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is automatically reactivated afte r you exit the offline profile. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 84. Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > T hemes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group
Personalize your device 102 together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalize themes further. The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) ar e indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the m emory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. To open a browser connection and download more themes, select Theme downloads . To activate a theme, scroll to it, and selec t Options > Apply . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Options > Edit to change the settings for Wallpaper and Power saver . To restore the selected theme to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mode Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications . By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch the active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applic ations shortcuts, press , select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Tools 103 Tools Multimedia key To open the shortcut assigned to the multimedia key, press and hold . To open a list of multimedia applications, press . To open the desired application, use the scroll key. To exit the list without selecting an applic ation, press . To change the shortcuts, press and . To change the applications that are shown when you press , select Top , Left , Middle , and Right and th e application. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them. Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . To open a settings group, press . Scroll t o a setting you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the la nguage of the display texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the lang uage accordin g to the information on your SIM ca rd. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac t ers available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device.
Tools 104 Select Default to use the default image, Te xt to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 110. After resetting, the device may take a longer ti me to power on. Documents and files are unaffec ted. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. Left selection ke y âÂÂAssign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode. Right selection key âÂÂAssign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcu ts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcu ts for the different presses of the centre selection key. The centre selection key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Display Brightness âÂÂAdjust the basic bri ghtness level of the display to lighter or darker. However, in extreme light conditions , the bright ness of the displa y i s automatically adjusted. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the screen saver is activated. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the d isplay is switched off. Cover display Select Personalisation and from the following: Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. If you select User defined in the wallpaper settings, the cropping tool frame is shown on top of the image you selected. The cropping tool frame is the size of the cover display, and you can zoom, rotate, and crop the area of the image you want to be displayed on the cover display. Closing animation âÂÂSelect a short animation to play when you close the cover. Closing tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play whe n you close the cover. Opening tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you open the cover and the device is in the standby mode. Select Calls and from the following:
Tools 105 Answer if fold opened âÂÂSelect No or Yes . If fold cl osed âÂÂSelect End call or Activate loudspe aker . Call settings Send my caller ID âÂÂSelect Yes or No to set your phone to be seen or hidden from th e person you are calling. Otherwise, the value may be se t by your service provider when you subscribe to the network service. Set by network is displayed. Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. To check whether the function is active, select Check status . To set the functio n on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a calle r informing why you could not ans wer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or reject a callâÂÂ, p. 63. Message text âÂÂWrite text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂYou can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the device t o briefly display the approximate duration of the last cal l. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbe rs assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 58. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On . To answer an incoming call briefly press any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in us e âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the stand by mode.
Tools 106 Line change âÂÂTo p revent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, mult iple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can shar e a data connection. You can also use a wire less LAN data connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points as follows: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the web application to view WML o r XHTML pages ⢠IAP to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection servic es, contact your service provider. Access points You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your serv ice provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. indicate s a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point, and a wireless LAN a ccess point . Tip! T o c r e a t e a n I A P i n a w i r e l e s s L A N , p r e s s , a n d select Conne ct. > Conn. mgr. > Availab. WLAN > Options > Define access point . To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions from your servic e provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data c onnection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. F ill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider.
Tools 107 To be able to use a data connection, the network serv ice provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data Follow the instructions from your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect IPv4 settin gs or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂEnte r the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary nam e serv.: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider to obtai n these addresses. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Wireless LAN Follow the instructions from your service provider. WLAN netw. na me âÂÂSelect Enter manually or Search for netw. . If you select an existing network, WLAN netw. mode and WLAN secur ity mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. WLAN netw. mode âÂÂSelect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a wireless LAN ac cess point device is not needed. WLAN security m ode âÂÂSelect the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open n etwork , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. WLAN security sett. âÂÂEnter the settings f or the selected security mode:
Tools 108 Security settings for WEP are as follows: Wep key in use âÂÂSelect the WEP key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same se ttings must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. Authentication type âÂÂSelect Open or Shared for the authentication type between your d evice and the wireless LAN access point device. WEP key settings âÂÂEnter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hex adecima l ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are as follows: WPA mode âÂÂSelect the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settings: EAP plug-in settings (on ly for EAP )âÂÂEnter the settings as your service provider instructs. Pre-shared key (only for Pre-shared key )âÂÂEnter a password. The same password must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. TKIP encryption âÂÂSelect whether Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) is used. Homepage âÂÂDefine a home page. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 settings : Phone IP address (the IP address of your device), Subnet mask (the subnet IP address), Default gateway (the gateway), and DNS address âÂÂEnter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 settings > DNS address âÂÂSelect Automatic , Well-known , or User defined . Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc )âÂÂTo enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data covera ge, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When ne eded , the device uses a
Tools 109 packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data mo dem to your computer. Wireless LAN Show availability âÂÂSelect whether is displayed when a wireless LAN is available. Scan for networks âÂÂIf you set Show availability to Yes , select how often the device se arch es for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN ad vanced settings is not recommended. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage, or the settings may be stored on your USIM card. You can save these settings to your device, view, or delete them in Configs. . Date and time See âÂÂClock settingsâÂÂ, p. 17 an d language se ttings in âÂÂGeneralâÂÂ, p. 103. Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 110. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock, PIN, and PIN2 codes. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 110. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Autolock period âÂÂYou ca n set an autolock period, a time-out after which the device automatically locks. To turn off the autolock period, select None . To unlock the device, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possib le to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manu ally, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone .
Tools 110 Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mainta ins a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to disp lay confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (ne twork se rvice). Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. PIN codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card . After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unbloc k it. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to ac cess some func tions in your device. Lock code (security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe plac e separate from y our device. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. PUK and PUK2 codesâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN co de or PIN2 code, resp ectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the servic e provider whose USIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificates do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, yo u can see a list of authority certificates that are s tored in your device. Press to see a list of person al certificates, if available. Digital certificates s hould be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for
Tools 111 actions that involve transferring confidential informatio n. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Imp ortant: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they mus t be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. T he existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificat es for increase d securit y to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid y et is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detai lsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not trusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificate. See âÂÂC hange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 111. Expired certificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certific ate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate ca nnot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing a ny certificate setting s, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certi ficate is show n. For example: Symbian installation > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers.
Tools 112 App. installation > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Track protection object Some copyright-protected music files may include a transaction identifier. Select whether you allow the identifier to be sent with the music file if you send or forward the file. The provider of the music file can use the identifier to track the distribution of the files. EAP plug-ins You can view the E AP plug-ins currently installed in your device (network service). Some Internet access points that use wireless LAN as a data be arer and WPA security mode use the plug-ins for authentication. Call divert Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anothe r phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls, select If busy . To check whether option is ac tive, select Check status . To set the option on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the rest riction password from your service provider. Select the desired barring optio n. To check whether option is active, select Check statu s . To set it on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers.
Tools 113 Network Your device can automatical ly switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the wireless service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. Cont act your service provider for more details. Operator se lection âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. I f the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the dev ice sounds a n error tone an d asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agr eement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activ ate cell info reception. Enhancement settings In the standby mode, indi ca tes a compatible h eadset is connected, and that the headset is unavailable , or a Bluetooth connection to a h eadset is lost. indicates a compatible loopset is connected and that a Text phone is connected. Select Headset , Loopset, Text phone , Bluetooth handsfree , or Car kit and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 100. Automatic answ er âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer is disabled. Automatic an swer is not available for Text phone . Lights (for car kit)âÂÂSet whether lights remain on or are switched off after the time-out.
Tools 114 If you are using a Text phone , you must activate it on your device. Press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Enhanceme nt > Text phone > Use Text phone > Yes . TV configuration Press , and select Tools > TV out . Select from the following: TV system âÂÂSelect PAL for PAL and SECAM TV system format or NTSC for NTSC TV sy stem format. Ratio âÂÂSelect 4:3 or 16:9 . Voice commands You can use voice commands to con trol your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 58. To activate enhanced voice commands for starting applications and profiles, press and select Tools > Voice cm. > Profiles . The device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles. To us e enhanced voice commands, press and hold in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profil e displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Opt ions > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, a bbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, select Option s > Playback . To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiz er that plays recognized voice tags and commands in the selected device language, select S ynthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, select Reset voice adapts . . Application manager Press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications an d software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and so ftware suit able for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifical ly designed fo r your Nokia d evice. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product.
Tools 115 Installa tion files may be tran sf erred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explo rer to tr ansfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation f iles (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amo unts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then u se the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. Install applications and software indicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fully ins talled, and that the application is installed on a compatible memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other softwa re from trusted s o urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 110. ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the orig inal application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask yo u to download it. If there is no access point defined for the appl ication, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 To locate an installation file, press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a memory ca rd (if inserted) in File mgr. , or open a message in Messag. > Inbox that contain s an installation file.
Tools 116 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate i t in the menu, and press . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packages are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send y our installation log to a help desk so that they can see what is installe d or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that softwar e. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check th e online certificates before installing an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default addre ss used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a netw ork connectio n to a specific access point for downloading ext ra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and
Tools 117 select Options > Suit e settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keys for copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, tran sferred or forwarded. To view the digital rights activation keys stored in your device, press , and select Tools > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose v a lidity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an in valid act ivation key a nd Options > Get activation key . Activation keys cannot be updated if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 50. To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the fi le, scro l l to an activation key, and press .
Troubleshooting 118 Troubleshooting Q&A Access code s Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 1234 5 . If you forget or lose the lock code , contact yo ur device de aler. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or wireless se rvice provider. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: To open the application switching window, press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions betwe en the devices. Check that the other device is not in the hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a B luetooth connection? A: If ano ther devi ce is conn ecte d to your device, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Connect. > Bluet ooth > Off . Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displayed: No valid access point d efined. Define o ne in Services setti ngs. ? A: Insert the correct browser se ttings. Contact your service provider for instructions. Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Remove the protective plastic film covering the display and camera. Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Q: Why is there audible noise from the camera when autofocus or optical zoom is used? A: Zoom and AF lens movement causes mechanical noise. S elect Op tions > Settings > Optical zoom during recording > Off to eliminate mechanical noise caused by lens movement when recording.
Troubleshooting 119 Q: Why do images or videos captured using night mode tend to be noisier under dark lighting conditions compared to normal mode? A: The output of the image se nsor unde r the dark lighting conditions is more amplified wi th night mode than with normal mode to provide better brightnes s. In return, th e noise level on the image or video increases. Q: Why do VGA video frames appear j agged when video stabilization is activated? A: Each video frame is enlarged from a smal ler size within VGA to the VGA size when video stabilization is activated. Due to this, the quality w ithin each frame is degraded compared to video without stabilizati on mode. Display Q: Why do missing, dis colored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristi c of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Home network (UPnP) Q: Why canâÂÂt I share files with other devices? A: Ensure that you h ave conf igured the home network settings. Select Connect. > Hom e net. > Share cont ent > Content sha ring , and the other device is UPnP compatible. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, select My ow n > Log > Options > Filt er > All communication . Memory low Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messag. ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Galle ry To delete contact information, cale ndar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, o r any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform op eration. Delete some d ata first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before del eting it? A: Save your data using one of the fo llowing methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back-up copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then save the images to your computer.
Troubleshooting 120 ⢠Send data using Bluetooth connectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compat ible memory card. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The cont act card does n ot ha ve a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: What should I do when the device cannot receive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough m emory to retrieve mes sage. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, select File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a mul timedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Select Messagi ng > Options > Settings > Multim. msg. . Q: How can I end the data connect ion when the device starts a data connecti on again and aga in? A: To stop the de vice from making a data connection, select Messaging and one of the following: On receiving msg. > Defer retrieval âÂÂto have the multimedia messaging center save the message t o be retrieved later, for example, after you have checked the settings. After this change, the device still needs to send information notes to t he network. To retrie ve the message now, select Retr. immediately . On receiving msg. > Reject message âÂÂto reject all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device needs to send information no tes to the networ k, and the multimedia messaging center deletes mult imedia messages that are waiting to be sent to you. Multimed ia recept. > Off âÂÂt o ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any ne twork connectio ns related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device t o my PC? A: Ensure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia PC Suite on t he DVD-ROM. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.noki a.com.
Troubleshooting 121 Wireless LAN Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN acces s point ma y use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access ne tworks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID and have created a WLAN internet access point for the network on your Nokia d evice. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: You cannot switch off WLAN on your Nokia device. To reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia d evice does not sca n for available networks. To turn off the background scan: 1 Press , and select Tools > Setting s > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 Select Scan for networks > Never . 3 To save your changes, select Done . When Scan for networks is se t to Never , your Nokia device still listens to available netw orks, and you can us e available WLAN networks as usua l.
Battery information 122 Battery information Charging and disc harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the b attery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is b eing used for the first t ime or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be mad e. Use the battery only for it s intended purpose. Ne ver use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circui ting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the p ositive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, l ook for the Nokia Original
Battery information 123 Enhancements logo on the packaging, and inspect the hologram label using the following s teps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. I f you have any reason to believe that your batt ery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and t ake it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Noki a s ervice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authen ticity. If authen ticity cannot be verified, return the battery to th e place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 do ts on each side respectively. 3 Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for exampl e, 12345678919876 543210. Turn the battery so th at the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 4 Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/batterycheck. To create a text message, enter the 20-digit code, for example, 12345678919876 543210, and send to 44 7786 2 00276. National and international operator charges will apply. You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. What if your b attery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an auth entic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufa cturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device
Battery information 124 and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approv al or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 125 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty co verage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitati on, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the de vice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving pa rts and ele ctronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open t he device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device. Rough handling can break intern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to cle an the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light s ensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of da ta you want to keep (such as contacts and calen dar notes) before sending your device to a service facility. ⢠To allow the device to re set, power the device off, and remove the battery from time to time for optim um performance. Make back-up copi es of all important data. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhanc em ent. If any device is not working properly, take it to t he nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 126 Additional safety information Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off yo ur device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position ag ainst the ear or when pos itioned at leas t 2.2 c entimeters (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device t he above-stated distance from your body. In order to t ransmit data fi les or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of dat a files or messages may be d elayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance inst ruct ions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are mag netic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit card s or other magnetic storage media near the devi ce, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeter s (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These re commendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 ce ntimeters (6 inches) from their pacemaker ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away.
Additional safety information 127 Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y instal led or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti skid (antilock) braking systems, electronic spee d control syste ms, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any e quipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should s ervice the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Fault y installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gas es, or explosive materials in the same compartment as th e device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that ai r bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipment in t he area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled and the ai r bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft i s prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operat ion of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone ne twork, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a poten tially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies.
Additional safety information 128 To make an emerg ency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Chec k for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain feature s are in use, you may first need to turn t hose features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINE S FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitte r and receiver. It is designed not to exce ed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by internationa l guidelines. These gui delines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using st andard operating positions wit h the device transmitting at its highest certified power l evel in all tested frequency bands. Th e actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That a mount chan ges depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a netw ork base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 0.54 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
129 Index A access points 106 activatio n keys 117 alarm cloc k 16 applications 114 , 115 B backing up 20 Bluetooth 83 device address 86 headset 113 pairing 86 security 85 switching off 87 bookmarks 70 C cache, clearing 72 calendar 74 call register. See log. calls dialled numbers 64 duration 65 international 57 received 64 settings 105 settings for call diverting 112 transferring 64 camera adjusting lighting and color 28 editing videos 31 flash 28 image setup s ettings 28 imaging mode 12 saving video clips 23 scenes 28 self-timer 27 sequence mode 27 still image camera settings 26 video recorder settings 24 certificates 110 clear screen. See standby mode. clock 16 , 17 codes 109 , 110 computer connections 83 conference call 57 connection settings 106 contact c ards inserting pictures 67 sending 67 storing DTMF tones 64 copying contacts 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data connections ending 92 indicators 15 date 16 device manager 92 digital rights management. See activation keys. E editing videos 31 , 32 e-mail 47 automatic retrieving 51 opening 51 remote mailbox 50 retrieving from mailbox 50 settings 54 viewing att achments 51 F file formats .jad, jar and sis 114 .jar 115
130 RealPlayer 78 file manager 21 fixed dialing 68 FM radio 76 G gallery 30 backup files 43 ordering files in albums 35 , 36 presentations 34 TV out mode 34 H handsfree. See loudspeaker. headset settings 113 help application 22 home network 19 I IAP. See access points. indicators 15 internet. See web. J Java. See applications. 114 L lock code 110 log 66 loopset settings 113 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 50 , 51 media files 78 , 79 memory 21 , 65 memory card 20 menu, rearranging 100 messaging 47 modem 93 modes 11 , 12 movies, muvees 81 multimedia messages 47 music player 39 transferring musi c 40 N Nokia PC Suite calendar data 74 transferring music files to your memory card 39 viewing device memory data 22 O office applications 95 P packet data connections 108 PC connections 83 personalization 101 phonebook See contact cards profiles 100 Q Quickoffice 95 R radio 76 RealPlayer 78 remote mailbox 50 remote SIM mode 85 ringing tones personal ringing tone 69 receiving in a text message 49 S security code. See lock code. sending contact and business cards 67 video clips 33 service commands 45 settings access codes 109 access points 106 Bluetooth connectivity 84 calendar 75 call barring 112 call diverting 112 certific ates 110 data connections 106 date and time 109
131 display 104 language 103 lock code 110 original settings 104 personalizing the device 100 PIN code 110 screen saver 104 UPIN code 110 UPUK code 110 shortcuts 13 SIM card copying na mes and numbers 68 messages 52 sis file 114 snooze 16 software 115 songs transferring 40 sound clips 30 sounds muting a ringing to ne 63 recording sounds 94 speed dialling 58 standby mode 100 svg files 34 synchronization 91 T text messages 47 themes 101 time 16 transferring content 14 transfer ring music 40 U UPIN code 110 UPnP 19 , 88 UPUK code 110 USSD commands 45 V video call 59 , 63 video clips 30 video player. See RealPlayer . Visual Radio 76 , 77 voice commands 114 voice dialling 58 voice mailbox 57 , 112 voice messages 57 voice tags 58 , 114 volume con trol 16 , 57 W web 70 wireless LAN 17 access point settin gs 107 create IAP 92 security 88 See also UPnP.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPOR ATION, declares that this RM-55 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other releva nt provisio ns of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be fo und at http://www .nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ The crossed-out wheeled bin means that within the Euro pean Union the product must be taken to separ ate co llection at the p roduct end-of-life. This applies to your device but also to any enhancement s marked with this symbol. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country specific information at www.nokia.com. é 2006 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseri es, N93, Visual Radio, and Pop-Port are trademarks or registered t rademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or traden ames of their respective owners. Reproduction, transf er, distribution, or storag e of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of Nokia is prohibited . This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998-2006. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are t rademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG -4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in conne ction with information w hich has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is gra nted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that relating to promotional, internal, and commercial use s may be obtained f rom MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia re serves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NO KIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INC OME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PRO VIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLIC ABLE LAW, NO WAR RANTIES OF A NY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR I MPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WA RRANTIES OF MERCHAN TABILITY AND FITNES S FOR A PAR TICULAR P URPOSE, A RE MADE IN RELATION TO THE A CCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NO TICE. The availability of particular products and applications and servi ces for these products may vary by region. Please ch e ck your Nokia dealer for de tails, and availability of language options. Export controls This device may contai n commodities, tec hnology or softwar e subject to export laws and regulations from the US a nd other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANAD A NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interfere nce (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operatio n is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) th is device must accept any interfe rence received , including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modific a tions not expressly approved by Nokia could void the userâÂÂs authority to operat e this equipment. The third-party applications provided with yo ur device may have been cre ated and may be owned by persons or entitie s not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellect ual property rights to the third-par ty applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ions, or the information in the applicat ions or these materials. Nokia does not provide any wa rranty for the thir d-party applications.
BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLIC ATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IM PLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITT ED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU F URTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MA KE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WA RRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPL IED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WAR RANTIES OF TITLE, ME RCHANTABILITY OR FITNE SS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE , OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WI LL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PA RTY PATE NTS, COP YRIGHTS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RI GHTS. Issue 2 EN, 9245183
Contents For your safety ................................. .......... 7 Get connected .......................................... 10 Your Nokia N93 ........................ ............... 11 Modes .......... .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ....... 11 Shortcuts ............. ................ .............. ............. .............. ......... 13 Settings ............ ................ ............. .............. .............. ............. 14 Transfer content from another de vice ................... ....... 14 Essential indicators....... ............. ................ .............. ........... 15 Keypad lock (key guard) .......... .............. ................ ............. 16 Volume and loudspeaker cont rol ....................... ............. 16 Clock .......... .............. ............. ................ .............. ............. ....... 16 Headset .......... ............. .............. ........... .............. ............. ....... 17 Wrist and lens cover st raps ............ ................ ................ .. 17 Wireless LAN .................. ................ ............. .............. ........... 17 Home network ................... ................ .............. ............. ....... 19 Web browser .................... ................ ............. .............. ......... 19 Memory card .................. ................ ............. .............. ........... 20 File manager .......... ............. .............. ................ ............. ....... 21 Help .............. .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ....... 22 Tutorial ............. ............. .............. .............. ................ ............. 22 Camera ........................ .............................. 23 Record videos ........... .............. ............. ................ .............. ... 23 Take pictures ................ ................ .............. .............. ............ 25 Gallery................. ............................... ....... 30 View images and video clips ......... ........... .................. ...... 31 Edit video clips .... ............ .................................. ........... ........ 31 Edit images ................... .............. .............. ............. ............... 33 Slide show ............ ............ .................................. ........... ........ 33 TV out mode ........... ...................... ....................... ........... ...... 34 Presentations................ .............. .............. ................ ............ 34 Albums ............ ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. . 35 Print online ............... ................ ............. .............. ................ . 35 Online sharing ................... .............. ............. ................ ........ 36 Media applications .................................. 39 Music play er ............. .............. ............. .............. ............. ...... 39 Image print ................. ................ .............. ............. .............. . 42 Back up files ............... .............. ............. ................ .............. . 43 Messaging................... .............................. 44 Write text ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. ........ 45 Write and send mess ages ..................... ................ ............ 47
InboxâÂÂreceive messages ................... ............. ................ ... 49 Mailbox...... ............. .............. ................ ............. .............. ....... 50 View messag es on a SIM card ................ ............. ............52 Messaging se ttings . .......... ............. ................ .............. ....... 52 Make calls .................................... ........... 57 Voice calls ............ ............. .............. .............. ............. ............ 57 Video calls....... .............. .............. ............... .............. ..............59 Video sharing ................. .............. ................ ............. ............ 60 Answer or reject a call .................. .............. .............. ......... 63 Log ........... .............. ................ ............. .............. .............. .........64 Contacts (phonebook) ........................ .... 67 Save names an d numbers ............... ............. ................ ..... 67 Copy contacts .............. ................ ............. .............. ..............68 Add ringing tones for contacts................... ................ ..... 69 Create contact groups.......... ................ .............. ................69 Services ......................... ........................... 70 Web access point...... ...................... ..................... ......... ....... 70 Bookmarks v iew ............ ................ .............. ............. ............ 70 Connection security ............ .............. ............... .............. ..... 71 Browse ................ ............. .............. ............. .............. ..............71 Download and purchase ite ms ............ ................ ............ 72 End a connection ................. .............. ............... ................ ... 72 Web settings ........... .............. .............. ............. ................ ..... 73 Calendar. ...................................... .............74 Create calendar ent ries ..................... ................ ............. ... 74 Meeting requests. .............. ................ ............. .............. ....... 74 Calendar views .............. ................ .............. ............. ............ 75 Manage your calendar entries........... ................ .............. 75 Calendar settings ................ ................ ............. .............. ..... 75 My own .. ............................... ....................76 Visual Radio ......... ........... .................................. ............ ....... 76 RealPlayer ....... ............ ........................................... ......... ....... 78 Flash Player ................ ............. .............. ................ ............. ... 80 Movie director ............. .............. ............. .............. ................ 81 Games ................... ............. .............. .............. ............. ............ 82 Connectivity ........................................ .....83 PC connections .................... ................ ............. .............. ..... 83 Data cable .................... .............. ............. ................ .............. 83 Bluetooth connectivity ............. ................ ................ ......... 83 Infrared connection ................... ................ ................ ......... 87 Home network........... ............. ................ .............. ................ 88 Synchronization ................. ............. ................ .............. ....... 91 Connection manager ................... ................ ................ ....... 91 Device manager ................. ............. ................ .............. ....... 92 Modem ......... .............. ............. ................ .............. ............. ... 93 Office ............. .............................. .............94
Recorder........... ............. ................ .............. .............. ............. 94 Converter .................... .............. ............. .............. .............. .... 94 Calculator ................... .............. ................ ............. .............. .. 94 Notes .................... .............. .............. ............. .............. ........... 95 Zip manager................. ............ ...................................... ....... 95 Quickoffice ............... ................ ............. .............. ................ .. 95 Adobe reader ......... ...................... .................................. ....... 97 Barcode reader................. .............. ............. ................ ......... 98 Personalize your device ........................ 100 ProfilesâÂÂset tones........... ................ ............. ................ ..... 100 Change the look of your device .. ........... .................. ..... 101 Active standby mode...... ........... .................................. ..... 102 Tools .... ....................................... ............ 103 Multimedia key ........... .............. ................ .............. ........... 103 Settings ............ ................ ............. .............. .............. ........... 103 TV configuration .......... .............. .............. ................ ..........114 Voice commands ............ ...................... ....................... ...... 114 Application manager ....... ........... ....................... ......... ...... 114 Activation keys for copyrigh t-prot ected files ...........117 Troubleshooting . ................................... 118 Q&A............... .............. .............. ............. .............. ............. .... 118 Battery information ............................. 122 Charging and discharging.............. ................ ................ . 122 Nokia battery authe ntication guidelines ...................122 Care and maintenance ...... ................... 125 Additional safety information . ............ 126 Index ................................... ................... 129
7 For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further inf ormation. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while drivi ng should be road safety. INTERFEREN CE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Foll ow any restrictions. Wireless devi ces can cause interference in aircra ft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir this product. ENHANCEMENTS AN D BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESIST ANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
8 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVI CES When connecting t o any other devi ce, read its use r guide for deta iled safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGEN CY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. The keypad is active only in the fold-open mode. Press the end key as many times as needed to clea r the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is app roved for use on the EGSM 900, 1800 , 1900, and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information abo ut networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legi timate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like computers, your devi ce may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmfu l content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To incr ease the security of your device, consider installing anti virus software with a regular update service and using a firewall application. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. This device supports common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 97, 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats ca n be viewed or modified. During operation, su ch as an active video shar ing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have some bookmarks or links preinstalled for or may allow access to si tes provi ded by third parties not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not endorse or assume any liability for these sites. If you c hoose to access
9 them, you should take the same prec autions, for security or content, as you woul d with any internet site. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not be available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with yo ur se rvice provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what c harges will apply. Some networ ks may have li mitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some network s may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not activ ated in your device. If so , these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more informa tion. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail, and content downl oading using the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the ba ttery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from a DC-4, AC-3, or AC-4 charger, and from an AC-1, ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-4 4 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6M. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approv ed enhancements, please chec k with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Get connected 10 Get connected Use your device on the 2G and 3G networks. See âÂÂYour Nokia N93â p.11 Use Bluetooth technology, for example, to transfer files and connect to compatible enhancements. See âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâ p. 83. Use infrared to transfer and synchronize data between compatible devices, for example. See âÂÂInfrared connect ionâ p. 87. Use a wireless LAN to connect to the internet and WLAN enabled devices. See âÂÂWireless LANâ p. 92. Use Nokia Connectivity Cable CA-53 to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See âÂÂData cableâ p. 83. Use Nokia Video Cable CA-64U to connect to a compatible TV. See âÂÂTV configurationâ p. 114. Use a compatibl e microSD card to tra nsfer data or back up information, for example. See âÂÂMemory card toolâ p. 20.
Your Nokia N93 11 Your Nokia N93 Model number: Nokia N93-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N93. Modes Your device has four mechanic al modes that are optimized for different us es: fold closed fo r carrying, f old open for traditional mobile phone use, image for recording video and taking pictures, and view for v iewing your images and videos. To switch between the modes, turn the fold and the swing axis display. There is a short time-out before a mode is activated. Fold-closed mode When the fold is closed, th e main display deactivates and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls end, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a compatible headset is connected. To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 104. If you are using the player to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play . In the fold-closed mode, the cover display provides clock and status information. On the standby mode display, the signal strength and battery indicators, time information, status indicators, and the name of the active profile (if other than General ) may be shown. If you use the music player to listen to a sound clip, volume bars and track information ar e displayed. Use the side scroll ke ys to play, pause, play the next or previous sound clip, and turn the volume up or down. If you are using Visual Radio in the fold-closed mode, the visual content is not shown on the cover display. You ca n store several preset stations with station name, frequency, and location information. Th is information is s hown on the cover display. To turn the audio on and off, change the channel, and seek new channels, use the scroll key on the side of the device. Calendar and clock alarms and notes for missed calls and new received messages are also displayed. To vie w received text messages and the text and image objects of received multimedia messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main display. Incoming calls are indica ted by their normal tone and a note. In the cover display settings, sel ect Answer if fold opened to answer a call when you open the fold. If a
Your Nokia N93 12 compatible headset is connected to the device, press the answer key on the headset. To change the settings, see âÂÂCover displayâÂÂ, p. 104. To make calls or use the menu, open the fold. To use the flash as a flashlight, press the flash key on the side of the device. To operate the flashlight, do the following: ⢠Quickly press th e flash key once. The flashli ght is activated for 1.5 seconds. ⢠Quickly p ress the flash ke y twice. The flashlight is activated for 3 minutes or until you press the flash key again. ⢠Press and hold the flash key. The flashlight is activated and stays on for as long as you hold the key or until the 3-minute time-out ends. Fold-open mode When you open the fold, the fold-open mode is activated automatically: the mai n display lights up, the k eypad is available, and you ca n access the menu. Scroll in the menu. The fold-open mode is activated even if the fold is not fully opened. The fold opens about 160 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more. Image mode When you open the fold to 90 degrees, hold the device sideways, turn the fold down so that the main display faces you, and the image mode is activated. The main camera is activated, and you can see the image to be captured. In image mode, yo u can record videos and take pictures. See âÂÂCameraâÂÂ, p. 23. In image mode, the numeric keypad is not active. You can use the capture key, zoom key, side scroll key, camera mode key, and flash key (all located on the side of the device), power key, and the landscape selec tion keys next to the main display. View mode When the fold is closed and you lift the side of the swing axis dis play when the fold is closed, the view mode is activated.
Your Nokia N93 13 Use the view mode to do the following: ⢠View your images. ⢠Activate photos and movies from the gallery to watch slideshows. ⢠Make hands-free video calls, and send live vi deo during a video call. Adjust the angle of the display for optimum secondary camera angle. Shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guid e for further details of the functions. Standby mode To switch between applicatio ns that are open, press and hold , and select an application. If memory is low, the device may close some applications. The device saves any unsaved data before closing an application. Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To start the camera, fully pr ess the capture key in image mode. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold . To open multimedia applications , press and hold . See âÂÂMultimedia keyâÂÂ, p. 103. To change the profile, press , and select a profile. To switch between General and Silent , press and hold . If you have two phone lin es, this action switches between the two lines. To open the last dialed numbers list, press . To use voice commands, press and hold . To start a connection to Services , press and hold . See âÂÂServicesâÂÂ, p. 70. For other shortcuts available in the standby mode, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. Edit text and lists To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold while you press or . To end the selection, release , then .
Your Nokia N93 14 To select letters and words, press and hold . At the same time, press or to highlight text. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , select Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste . Settings Your Nokia device normally has MMS, GPRS, strea ming, and mobile internet setting s automatically configured, based upon your service provider information. You may have settings from your serv ice provider already installed in your device, or you may receive the settings from the service provider as a special text message. Transfer content from another device You can copy content such as contacts a nd calendar entries from a compatible Nokia device to your Nokia device using Bluetooth connecti vity or infr ared. The type of content that can be cop ied depends on the phone model. You can insert your SIM card in the other device. When your Nokia device is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is au tomatically activated. Transfer content 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer . 2 In the information view, select Continue . 3 Select whether you want to use Bluetooth connectivity or infrared to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. 4 If you select Bluetooth connectivity, to have your Nokia device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue . Select the other device from the list. You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia device. Enter a code (1-16 digits ), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK . The devices are now paired. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. For some phone models, Transfer is sent to the other device as a message. To install Transfer on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. If you select infrared, connect the tw o devices. See âÂÂInfrared connectionâÂÂ, p. 87. 5 From your Nokia device, select t he content you want to copy from the other device. Content is copied from the memory and compat ible memory card (if inserted) of the other device to the corresponding location in your Nokia device and memory card (if ins erted). The copyin g time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel copying and continue later.
Your Nokia N93 15 To view the log information of a previous transfer, in the main view, select Transfer log . To view the de vices you have copied or transferred data from, in the main view, select Phones . Essential indicators The device is being used in a GSM network. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). You ha ve one or mor e unread m essages in the Inbox folder in Messag. . You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sen t in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. Shown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail a lert tone are set to Off . The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is ac tive. The second phone line is be ing used (network service). All calls to t he device ar e forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines (network service), the indicator for the first line is and for the second . A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible loopset is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is available. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is active. A GPRS or EDGE packet data connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available. A UMTS packet data connection is active. A UMTS packet data connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is a vailabl e. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 109. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on.
Your Nokia N93 16 Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. A USB connection is active. An infrared connection is a ctive. I f the indi cator is blinking, the device is trying to connec t to the other device or the connection has been lost. Keypad lock (keyguard) Use the keypad lock to prevent accidental keypresses. To turn on the displ ay light when the keypad lo ck is on, press . ⢠To lock, pr ess , then . Whe n the keys are locked, is shown on the display. ⢠To unlock with the fold-open, press , then . ⢠To unlock with the fold-closed, press and hold the camera mode key. When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or . The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker duri ng a call, select Option s > Activate loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate handset . Clock Select Clock application. To set a new alarm, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is ac tive, is shown. To turn off the ala rm, select Stop , or to stop th e alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not
Your Nokia N93 17 select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an ala rm, select Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock set tings, select Clock > Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone informa tio n to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the ala rm tone, select Clock alarm tone . World clock To open the world clock view, op en Clock , and press . In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main vi ew, and the time in your device is changed according to th e city selected. Check that the time is correct and match es your time zone. Headset Connect a compatible headset to the Pop-Port TM connector of your de vice. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Wrist and lens cover straps Thread the straps as shown, and tighten them. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network (wireless LAN). With wireless LAN, you can
Your Nokia N93 18 connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have wireless LAN. For information about using your device in a home network, see âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 19. To use wireless LAN, a wireless LAN must be avilable in the location, and your device must be connected to the wireless LAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LA N. Check with your local auth orities for mor e information . Features using wireless LAN, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the follo wing wireless LAN features: ⢠IEEE 802.11b/g standard ⢠Operation at a frequency of 2.4 GHz ⢠Wired equivalent privacy (W EP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WP A), and 802.1x encryption methods. These f unctions can be used on ly if they are supported by the network. Wireless LAN connections To use wireless LAN, you must crea te an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the intern et. See âÂÂWireless LAN access pointsâ in t he Additional applications guide. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryp tion reduces the risk of unaut horized ac ce ss to y our data. A wireless LAN connection is established when you cr eate a data connection using a wi reless LA N Internet access point. The active wireless LAN connection ends when you end the data connection. To end the connection, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 91. You can use wireless LA N duri ng a vo ice call or when packet data is active. Yo u ca n only be connected to one wireless LAN a ccess point devi ce at a time, but seve ral applications can use the sa me wireless LAN connection. When you activate Offline , you can still us e wireless LAN (if available). Rem ember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when esta blishing and using a wireless LAN connection. Tip! To check the unique media access c ontrol (MAC) address that identifies yo ur device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. For information about WLAN wizard, see âÂÂWLAN wizardâ in the Additional applications guide.
Your Nokia N93 19 Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP. With a wireless LAN access point device, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support wireless LAN to the network, such as your Noki a device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or a TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. After you have configured the home network, you can copy, view, or play compatible media files and print images in Gallery on the other connected compatible devices, for example, view images stored on your No kia device on a compatible TV. See âÂÂHome networkâÂÂ, p. 88 and âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. To set up home n etworking in you r wireless LAN, first create and configure your wireless LAN home Internet access point, then configure the devices. On your Nokia device, configure the settings in Home net. . To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the Media Server software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your Nokia device. After you have completed the necessary configura tions in all devices connec ted to the network, you can st art using Home net. to share your med ia files. See âÂÂView media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. Web browser Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), ext ensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext markup la nguage (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Press , and select Internet > Web . With this additional browser, you are able to view normal web pages, to zoom in and ou t on a page (Mini Map), to view web pages that contain only text in narrow form so that text wraps, and to read feeds and blogs. To turn the Mini Map on or off for the current page, press . When the Mini Map is on, an overview of the complete page is shown when you scroll on the page. See also âÂÂWeb access pointâÂÂ, p. 70.
Your Nokia N93 20 Memory card You can use a compatible miniSD card as extra storage space to save the memory on your device. You can also back up information fr om your device to the memory card. Use only compatible miniSD cards with this device. Other memory cards, such as Redu ced Size MultiMediaCards, do not fit in the memory card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the m emory card a s well as the de vice, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Insert the memory card 1 To open the door of the memory card slot, swing it upwards in a counterclockwise direction. 2 Insert the m emory card in the slot. Ensure that the contact area on the card is fa cing up. 3 Push the card in. You hear a click when the card locks into place. 4 Close the door. Eject the mem ory card 1 Before you eject the card, press , and sel ect Remove mem. card . All applications are closed. 2 When Remove memory card and press 'OK' is displayed, swing open the door of the memory card slot. 3 Press the memory card to release it from the slot. 4 Remove the memory card. If the device is switche d on, select OK when prompted to confirm the removal. Important : Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the car d is bein g accesse d. Removing the card in the middle of a n operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Memory card tool Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a compatible miniSD card as extra storage sp ace and for backing up the information in the device memory. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem.
Your Nokia N93 21 To restore info rmation from the m emory card to the device memory, select Options > Restore from card . Format a memory card When a memory card is reform atted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplie d preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To format a memory card, se lect Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. Tip! For opti mal performance, use your Nokia device to format all new miniSD ca rds. File manager Many features of the dev ice, such as contacts, messages, images, videos, ringing tones, calendar notes, documents, and downloaded applications, use memory to store data. The free memory available depends on how much data is already saved in the device memory. You can use a compatible mini SD card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewritable, so you can delete old information and save new data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the device memory or on a memory card (if inserted), press , and select T ools > File mgr. . The device memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ) (if available). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Option s > Move to folder or Copy to folder . To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory f rom which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file name. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the device and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Me mory details . The amount of available memory is shown in Free memory . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The device notifies you if the device or the memory card memory is low.
Your Nokia N93 22 To free device memory, tran sfer data to a compatible memory card, if you have on e. Mark files to be moved, and select Move to folder > Memory card and a fo lder. You can also trans fer media files to a compatible PC, for example, using the transfer option in Gallery. See âÂÂBack up filesâÂÂ, p. 43. Tip! Use Nokia Phone Browser in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memori es in your device and transfer data. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. or the respective app lication. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages from the Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messag. ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact info rmation â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also âÂÂApplication managerâÂÂ, p. 114. ⢠Any other data that you no longer need After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation fi les (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to ba ck up installation files to a compatible PC, then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message atta chment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view its help topics. Tutorial The tutorial gives you information about some of the features of your device. To ac cess the tutorial i n the menu, press , and select My own > Tutorial and the section you want to v iew.
Camera 23 Camera Your Nokia N93 has two cameras, a high-resolution camera on the side of the de vice (the main camera) and a lower-resolution camera on the top of the main display (the secondary camera). You can use both cameras to take still images and record video in the portrait and landscape views. The Nokia N93 device supports an image capture resolution of 2048x1536 pixels using the main camer a. The image resolution in these ma terials may appear different. The images and video clips ar e automatically saved in the Images & v ideo folder in Gallery . The cameras pr oduce .jpg images. Video clips are recorded in the .mp4 file format or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension ( Sharing modes). See âÂÂVideo settingsâ , p. 24. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachme nt or by using B luetooth connectivity. Record videos To activate the main camera rotate the display to image mode. If the camera is in image mode, use the camera mode key, or se lect Options > Switch to video mode to switch to video mode. Press the capture key to start recording. The record icon is displayed and a tone sounds. The red recording indicator is lit, indicating that video is being recorded. 1 To stop recording at any time, press the capture key. 2 To pause the recording, select Pause; to resume recording, select Continue . The video clip is automatically saved to Images & video in Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. To make lighting and color adjustments before recording a video in the imaging mode, scroll through the toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28 and âÂÂShooting modesâÂÂ, p. 28. To zoom in or out of the subject (continuous 3x optical and up to 20x digital zoom), rotate the zoom key on the side of the device. The video viewfinder displays the following:
Camera 24 ⢠Status indicators (1) for audio mute on, stabilization on, video light mode, and the current capture mode. ⢠The toolbar (2), which you can scroll through before recording to select the shooting mode, white balance, and color tone (the toolbar is not displayed during rec ording). ⢠The total available video recording time (3). When you are recording, the current vi deo length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. ⢠The device memory ( ) and me mory card ( ) indicators (4) show where videos are saved. ⢠The video quality indicator (5) indicates whether the quality of the video is TV (high) , TV (normal), Handset (high) , Handset (normal) , or Sharing . ⢠The video clip file type (6). Tip! Select Options > Turn icons on to display all viewfinder indicators or Turn icons off to di splay only the video status indicators. After you record a video clip, select the following from the toolbar: ⢠To immedia tely play the video clip you jus t recorded, select Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete . ⢠To send the video using multimedia, e-mail , Bluetooth connectivity, or infrared, press , or select Sen d . For more information, see âÂÂMe ssagingâÂÂ, p. 44 and âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 83. This option is not available dur ing an active call. Yo u cannot send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠To record a new video clip, select New video . Tip! Activate the Offline profile to ensure your video recording is not interrupted by incoming calls. Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder: Video setup and main settings. To adjust Video se tup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. T o change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect Off if you do not wa nt to record sound. Exit Options Exit Options
Camera 25 Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to TV (high) (best quality for long term usage and play back on a compatible TV or PC and handset), TV (normal) , Handset (high) , Handset (normal) , or Sharing (limited video clip size to send using multimedia message (MMS) ). If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV (high) , which has VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. To send the vide o clip through MMS, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, .3gp file format). T he size of th e video clip recorded with Sharing is limited to 300 KB (about 20 seconds in durati on) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Video stabilisation âÂÂSelect On to reduce camera sh ake when recording the video. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to add the recorded vi deo clip to a cer tain album in Gallery . Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured vide o âÂÂSel ect whet her you wan t the first frame of the recorded video clip to be shown on the display after the recording stops. Select Play from the toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the video clip. Optical zoom during recording âÂÂSelect On or Off . Select Off to eliminate mechanical noise caused by lens movement during optical zooming when recording. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: device memory or memory card (if inserted). Take pictures To activate the main camera rotate the display to image mode. If the camera is in video mode, use the camera mode key, or select Options > Switch to image mode to switch to image mode. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (m ain camera only) . The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it half way down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. To take a picture, in the ma in camera, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To make lighting and color adjustments before taking a picture in image mode, scroll through the toolbar. See âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. Saving the captured image may ta ke longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or color settings. The camera viewfinder displays the following:
Camera 26 ⢠Status indicators (1) for sequence on, self-timer on; Automatic () , On () , or Off () flash mode, and the current capture mode. ⢠The toolbar (2), which you can scroll through before capturing the image to select the shooting mode, white balance, exposure value, and color tone (the toolbar is not displayed during focus and image capture). ⢠The image resolution indi cato r (3) indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 3M - Large (2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Med. (1600x1200 resolution), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960 resolution), or MMS 0.3M (640x480 resolution). ⢠The image counter (4) displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use (the counter is not displayed during focus and image capture). ⢠The device memory ( ) and memor y card ( ) indicators (5) show where images are saved. Tip! Select Options > Turn icons on to display all viewfinder indicators or Turn icons off to displ ay only the camera status indicators. When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠Use both hands to keep the camer a still. ⢠The quality of a digitally zo omed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes in to the battery s avi ng mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue taking pictures, press . After you take the picture, select the following from the toolbar: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete . ⢠To send the video using multimedia, e-mail , Bluetooth connectivity, or infrar ed, press , or select Send . ⢠To capture a new image, select New image . ⢠To print the picture, select Print . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Still image camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the still image camera: Image setup and main settings. To a djust Image setup , see âÂÂSetup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lightingâÂÂ, p. 28. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you Exit Options
Camera 27 change them again. To cha nge the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â Print 3M - Large (2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Med. (1600x1200 resolu tion), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960 resolution), or MMS 0.3M (640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. If you want to print the image, select Print 3M - Large , Print 2M - Med. , or Print 1.3M - Small . If you want to send it through e-mail, select Print 1.3M - Sm all . To send the image through MMS, select MMS 0.3M . These resolutions are only av ailable in the main camera. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pi ctures right away. Extended zoom (main camera only)âÂÂSelect On (continuous) to allow the zoom increments to be smoot h and continuous between digita l and extended digital zoom or On (paused) to allow the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step poin t. If you want to limit the zoom to where the selected image quality is maintained, select Off . Flicker cancellation âÂÂSelect 50Hz or 60Hz . Shutter ton e âÂÂSelect the tone you want to hear when you take a pi cture. Memory in use âÂÂSelect wh ere to store you r images. Take pictures in a sequence Sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the camera to take up to six pictures i n a sequence (if enough memory available), select Options > Sequence mode . To take the pictures, press th e capture key. After you take the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press to open it. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. You in the pictureâÂÂself-tim er The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Self timer > 2 seconds , 10 seconds , or 20 seconds . To ac tivate the s elf-timer, s elect Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device be eps
Camera 28 when the timer is runnin g. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. You can also use the se lf-timer in the sequence mode. Tip! Select Options > Self timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Flash The flash is available on ly in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available: Automa tic () , On () , a n d Off () . To switch between the flash modes, press the flash key. Setup settingsâÂÂadjust color and lighting To enable the camera to r e produce colors and lighting more accurately or to add ef fects t o your pictures or videos, scroll through the tool bar, and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂSelect a proper shooting mode for the environment in which you take pictures. Every shooting mode uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a c ertain kind of environmen t. White balance âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reprodu ce colors more accurately. Exposure value (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a color effect from the list. The screen display changes to match any settings you make so you see how the chan ge af fects the pictures or vide os. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings apply on ly to the main camera. Independent settings are available for image and video modes, and are retained when switching between the two modes. Shooting modes A shooting mode helps you to find the right color and lighting settings for the curr ent environment. Select a proper shooting mode for taking pictures or recording video clips from the shooting mode list. The settings of each shooting mode have been set according to a certain style or environment.
Camera 29 Shooting modes are only ava ilable in the main camera. Scroll through the toolbar, an d select from the video or image shooting modes. When you take pictures, the default shooting mode is Automatic . To make your own shooting mode suitable for a certain environment, select User > Options > Change . I n the user defined shooting mode you can adjust different lighting and color settings. To copy the settings of another shooting mode, select Based on shooting mode and the desired shooting mode.
Gallery 30 Gallery To store and organize your images, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery from the Camera application, select Optio ns > Go to Gallery . From Camera , only the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch fr om Galle ry to the camera, in the Images & vide o folder, press the capture key or the camera mode key, or select Options > Go to Camera . Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Streaming links , P resentatio ns , All files , or Home net. , and press to open it. Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer a pplication. See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 78. You can also create albums; and mark, and add items to albums. See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 35. To open a file, press . Videos open in RealPlayer , and music and soun d clips in Music player . See âÂÂView images and video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. To copy or move files to a compatible memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Move and copy . Select Copy to memory card or Move to memory card Selec t Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory car d (if inserted) are indicated with . Files stored on the device memory are indicated with . To reduce the size of images that you already copied to other locations, such as to a compatible PC, select Options > Transfer and memory > Shrink . To reduce the resolution of an image to 640 x480, select Shrink . To increase free memory space after you have copied items to other locations or devices, select a file and Option s > Transfer and memory > Free memory . See âÂÂBack up filesâÂÂ, p. 43. To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downl. , Video downl. , Track downl. , or Sound downl. . The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from which the site can download. To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through wireless LAN, you must firs t create and configure your wireless LAN h ome Internet access point, and then configure the Home n et. application. See âÂÂWireles s LANâ , p. 17.
Gallery 31 The options related to Home net. are not available in Gallery before the settings for Home net. have been configured. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera are stored in Images & video in Gallery . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, through Bluetooth connectivity, or by using infrared. To be able to view a received image or video clip in the gallery or in the media player, you must save it in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if insert ed). Open Images & v ideo in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a loop, and ordered by date. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Option s > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. See âÂÂE dit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. See âÂÂEdit imagesâÂÂ, p. 33. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Albums > Add to album . See âÂÂAlbumsâÂÂ, p. 35. To create custom video clip s, select a video clip or several clips in the gallery and Options > Edit . See âÂÂEdit video clipsâÂÂ, p. 31. To print your images on a compatible printer, or to store them on your memory card (if inserted) for printing, select Options > Pr int . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. To send a multimedia message to your service provider's media file uploading serv ice (network service), press , and select Upload (if available). Contact your service provider for more informa tion. To view the image, scroll to an image, and press . When the image is opened, to zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . The zooming ratio is at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanent ly. To use the picture as a background image, select the picture and Opti ons > Assign > Set as wallpaper . To delete an image or video clip, press . Edit video clips To edit video clips in Gallery and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. To creat e custom video clips, combine and trim video clips, and add images, sound clips, transitions,
Gallery 32 and effects. Transitions are vi sual effects that you c an add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. You can also use Movie director to create custom video clips. Select the video clips and images you want to create a muvee with and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . See âÂÂMovie direct orâÂÂ, p. 81. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeline. The images, text, and transitions added to a video clip are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit > Video editor . To modif y the vide o, select from the fo llowing opt ions: Edit video clip âÂÂCut, add color effect, use slow motion, mute or unmute sound, move, remove, or duplicate the clip. Edit text (shown only if you added text)âÂÂMove, remove, or duplicate text; change the color and style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text. Edit image (shown only if you added an image)âÂÂMove, remove, or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and set a background or a color effect to the image. Edit sound clip (shown only if you have added a sound clip)âÂÂCut or move t he sound clip, adjust it s length, or remove or duplicate the clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. You can se lect st art transition when the first transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSelec t Video clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound clip . Movie âÂÂPreview the movie in the full screen or as a thumbnail, save or send the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. To take a snapshot of a video clip, in the cut video view, select Options > Take snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press , and select Take snapshot . To save your vide o, select Opti ons > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Op tions > Settings . The default is the device memory. In Settings , you can also define Default video name , Default sc. shot name , Resolution , and Memory in use .
Gallery 33 To send the video, select Send > Via multime dia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. Tip! If you want to send a video clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth wireless technology. See âÂÂSend dataâÂÂ, p. 85. You can also transfer your videos to a compatible PC using Bluetooth connectivity, or by using a c ompatible memory card reader enhancement. Edit images To edit the pictures after taking them, or images already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . Select Apply effect to crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, color, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a fr ame to the picture. To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Move the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back . Th e selected areas form a rectangle that represents the cropped image. If you selected a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press . To move the area within the pictu re, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press . To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press . A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press . Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full screen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press or . ⢠To zoom in or out, press or . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, press , , or . Slide show Select Options > Slide show > Start to view images and video clips in the full screen mode. The slid e show starts from the selected file . Select from the following:
Gallery 34 Play âÂÂto open the RealPlayer application, and play a selected video clip Pause âÂÂto pause the slide show Continue âÂÂto resu me the slide show, if paused End âÂÂto close the slide show To browse the images, pres s (previous) or (next). To adjust the tempo of t he slide show, before starting the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings > Delay between slides . To add sound to the slide show, select Options > Slide show > Settings and from the following: Music âÂÂSelect On or Off . Track âÂÂSelect a music file from the list. To decrease or increase the v olume during the slide show, press or . TV out mode You can watch videos and images stored in your device on the screen of a compatible TV. Connect a compatible Nokia Video connectivity cable to the video input of a compatible TV. For all applications other than the Images & video folder in Gallery and RealPlayer , the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, the Zoom in option is not available. When image is not zoomed, the opened image is displayed on the TV in full screen. You can view videos and images as a slide show. All items in an album or marked videos and images are displayed o n the TV in full screen while the selected music plays. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealP layer starts playing the video clip on th e device display and the TV screen. See âÂÂRealPlayerâÂÂ, p. 78. All audio, including the stereo video clip sound, ringing tone, and key tone, is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video-Out Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. TV out settings must be configured for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See âÂÂTV configurationâÂÂ, p. 114. Presentations With presentations, you can view .svg (sc alable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. These images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view .svg files, select the Pres entations folder, scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To zoom in, press . To zoom out, press .
Gallery 35 To switch between full screen and nor mal screen, press * . Albums With albums you can conveniently manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums > View albu ms . To add a picture or a video clip to an album i n the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press . To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gallery . Print online With the Print online application you can print images online, and order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mous e pads. The available products depend on the service provider. In order to use Print online, you must subscribe to the service with an online printing s ervice provider and hav e at least one printing service conf iguration file installed. The files can be obtained from prin ting service providers that support Print online . You can only print images that are in jpeg format. 1 Press , and sele ct Gallery > Images & video . Select an image or images, and Options > Print > Order prints . 2 Select a service provider from the list. 3 Select Options and from the following: Open âÂÂto start the connection to the service provider Remove âÂÂto remove the service provider from the list. If you remove the last service provider from the list, the Order prints option is not available until you have at least one configuration file installed. Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders: the name of the service provider, total sum, and status of the order. When you are connected to the service provider server, the images preview view opens, and displays the images you selected in Gallery . 4 Select Options and from the following: Preview âÂÂto view the image before ordering a print. Scroll up or down to view the images. Order now âÂÂto submit your order Change product order âÂÂto adjust the product details and number of copies for the selected image. In the product order view, you can select which product and of what type you want to order. The available options and products vary depending on the service provider. Scroll left or right to view and change the image details of the other images in the order.
Gallery 36 Change customer info âÂÂto change the customer and order informa tion. You ca n copy the customer information from contacts. Add image âÂÂto add more images to t he order Remove image âÂÂto remove images from the order Log âÂÂto view the details of the previous orders. When the order is sent, Order sent success fully is displayed. Online sharing Note: The availability of this service may v ary accordin g to your co untry or sales area . With the Online sharing application, you can share your images and videos in online albums, weblogs, or in other online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished pos ts as drafts and con tinue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Get started To use Online sharing , you must subscribe to the serv ice with an online image sharing service provider. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of th e service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to the service. For more information on compatible service providers, see www.nokia.com/support . When you open the service for the first time in th e Online sharing application, you are prompted to provide the user name and password. You can access the settings later through Options > Settings in the Online sharing application. See âÂÂOnline sharing settingsâÂÂ, p. 37. Upload files Press , and select Gallery > Images & vide o , the files you want to upload, and Options > Send > Web upload . You can access the Online shari ng application also from the main camera. The Se lect service view opens. To create a new accoun t to a service, select Options > Add new account or the service icon with the text Create new in the services list. If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a web browser on a compatible PC, to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . To select a service, press the scroll key. When you select the ser vice, the selected images and videos are shown in the edit state. You can open and view
Gallery 37 the files, reorganize them, add text to them, or add new files. To cancel the web upload process, and save the created post as a draft, select Back > Save as draft . If the uploading has already started, select Canc el > Save as draft . To connect t o the service and upload the files to the web, select Options > Upload , or press . Open online service To view uploaded images and videos in the online service, or draft and sent entries in your device, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Open service . Accoun ts can also be created and modified offline. If you have created a new account offline, or modified an account or service settings through a web browser, and wish to update the services list in your device, select Options > Retrieve services . Select a service from the list. After you open a serv ice, select from the following: ⢠Open in Web browser âÂÂto connect to the selected service and view the uploaded and draft albums in the web browser. The view may vary depending on the service provider. ⢠Drafts âÂÂto view and edit the draft entr ies, and upload them to the web ⢠Sent âÂÂto view the 20 latest entries created through your device ⢠New post âÂÂto create a new entr y The available options may vary depending on the service provid er. Online shar ing settings To edit the Online sharing settings, in the Online sharing application, select Options > Settings . My accounts In My accounts , you can create new accounts or edit existing accounts. To create a new accoun t, select Options > Add new acco unt . To edit an existing account, select an account and Options > Edit . Select from the following: Account name âÂÂto enter a name for the account Service provider âÂÂto select the service provider you want to use. You cannot change the service provider for an existing account, you must create a new account for the new service provider. If you delete an account in My accounts , the services related to the account are also deleted from you device, including the sent items for the service.
Gallery 38 User name and Password âÂÂto enter the user name and password you created for your account when you registered to the online service Upload image size âÂÂto select the size in which t he images are upload ed to the ser vice Application settings Display im age size âÂÂto select the size in which the image is shown on the display of your device. This setting does not affect the upload image size. Display text size âÂÂto select the font size used to display text in draft and sent entries, or when you add or edit text to a new entry Advanced Service providers âÂÂto view or edit service provider settings, add a new service provider, or view details of a service provider. If you change the service provider, all the My accounts information for the previous service provider is lost. You cannot change the settings of predefin ed servic e provid ers. Default access point âÂÂto change the access point used to connect to the online service, select the access point you want.
Media applications 39 Media applications Music player Press , and select Music player . With the mu sic player, you can play music files and cr eate and listen to playlists . Warning: L isten to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Add music When you open the music player for the f irst time, the player searches the device memory for music fil es to create a music librar y. After you add or remove music files in the device, update your music library. Select Options > Music library > Options > Update Music libr ary . Tip! You can transfer music files from your dev ice to a compatible memory card (if inserted) with Nokia Music Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. Play music When you open the music player, the previously played track or playlist is displayed. To view the music library, select or Options > Music library and the desired song list. To start playing the songs in the view, select Options > Pl ay . When a song is playing, to change between play and pause, press or . To stop a song, press . To fast forward or re wind, press and hold or . To start playing t he next or previous song, press or . To view the currently played song list, select or Options > Open 'Now playing' . To save the song lis t as a playlist, select Opt ions > Add to track lis t , and create a new playlist, or select a saved playlist. To adjust the volume, press or . To modify the tone of music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To select between random play and normal play mode, select Options > Random play . To select whether playing
Media applications 40 stops at the end of the play list or restarts from its beginning, select Options > Loop . To open your web bookmarks for downloading music, select Options > Track downloads . To return to the standby mode and leave the music playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . Music library To view the music l ibrary, select Options > Music library . All tracks lists all music. To view sorted songs, select Albums , Artists , Ge nres , or Compo sers . T he album, artist, genre, and composer informatio n is collect ed from the ID3 or M4A tags of the song files, if avail able. To add songs, albums, artists, genres, or composers to a playlist, select the items and Options > Add to track list . You can create a new playlist or add to an existing one. To view play lists, select Track l ists . To create a new playlist, select Options > New track list . When viewing a playlist you have created yourself, to ad d more songs, select Options > Add tracks . To delete a playlist, press . Deleting a playlist only deletes the playlist, not the music files. Transfer music You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. For details, see âÂÂBluetooth connectivityâÂÂ, p. 83. To refresh the library after you have updated the song selection in your device, select Options > Update Mu sic library The requirements of the PC for music transfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later) ⢠A compatible version of Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from the Nokia N93 section of the Nokia website. ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.7 or later Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music: ⢠To view your device on a PC as an external hard drive where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Mass storage as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB cable and select Media
Media applications 41 player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. ⢠To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite, c onnect the compatible USB cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. To change the default USB connection mode, press , select Connect. > Data cbl. > Data cable mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been optim ized for transferring music files. For information about tr ansferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the Nokia PC Suite user guide. Music transfer with Windows Media Player The functionality of the musi c synchronization may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and helps. Manual synchronization After connecting your device with a co mpatible P C, Windows Media Player selects manual synchroniz ation if there is not enough free memory in your device. With manual synchronization, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. The first time you connect your device you must enter a name that is used as the name of your device in Windows Media Player. To transfer manu al selections: 1 After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane, if more than one device is connected. 2 Drag the songs or albums to the list pane for synchronization. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the list, and click Remove from list . 3 Check that the list pane contains the fil es you want to synchronize and that there is enough free memory on the device. Click Start Sync. to start the synchronization. Automatic synchronization To change the default file transfer option in Windows Media Player, click the arrow under Sync , select your device, a nd click Se t up Sync. Clear or select the Sync this device automatically check box. If the Sync this device automatically check box is selected and you connec t your device, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on playlists you have selected in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchron ization. Note t hat your PC library may contain more files that can fit to the device memory and the compatible memory card of your device. See the Windows Media Player help for more information.
Media applications 42 The playlists on your device are not synchronized with the Windows Media Player playlists. Image print Use Image print to print your images using a compatible data cable, wireless LAN (if available), Bluetooth connectivity, or a compatible memory card (if availab le). You can only print images that are in jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in jpeg forma t. To print images with Image pr int , select the image you want to print and the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. To print to a printer compatible with Image print , connect the data cable before you select the print option. Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a printer compatible with Image print using a Nokia conn ectivity cable CA-53, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Options > Prin t settings > Default p rinter . Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery. The selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the la yout, press or through the available layouts for t he selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, press or to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary, depe nding on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view.
Media applications 43 Back up files To transfer and back up media files from your device to a compatible PC through the wireless LAN, select Options > Transfer and memory > Autom atic transfer . See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. Your device starts a device search. Select a device and a folder to which you want to transfer the media files. Select OK . To change the Storage device or Storage folder se ttings, select Options > Sett ings .
Messaging 44 Messaging Press , and selec t Messag. . In Messag. , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, and special text messages containing data. You can also receive mes sages and data using Bluet ooth connectivity or infrared, receiv e web service messages, cell broad cast messages, and send service commands. Note: Your d evice may indica te that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate whet her the message is received at the intended de stination. Fo r more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. To create a new message, select New message . Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia mess ages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. Messag. contains the following folders: Inbox âÂÂReceived messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. E-mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂOrganize your messages into folders. Tip! To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the templates folder. Mailbox â C o n n e c t t o y o u r r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o r e t r i e v e your new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages of f line. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Drafts âÂÂDraft messages that ha ve not been sent are stored here. Sent âÂÂThe last 20 messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent usin g Bluetooth connectiv ity or infrared, are stored here. To change the number of messages to be sa ved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 56. Outbox âÂÂMessages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored here. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). Receiving a
Messaging 45 delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, to switch between the folders, press or . To enter and send service requests (also kn own as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service prov ider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messag. . Cell broadcast (network service) allows you to receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions from your service provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Option s > Cell broadcast . In the main view, you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text ABC , abc , and Abc indicate the selected character mode. 123 indicates the number mode. Traditional text input is displayed when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character a ppears. There are more chara cters available for a number k ey th an are printed on the key. ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period) , and enter the letter. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. Predictive text input You can enter any letter with a single keyp ress. Predictiv e text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can add new words. is displayed when you write text using predictive text input. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Predictive text on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the device.
Messaging 46 2 To write the desired word, press the ke ys, â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write "Nokia" when the English dictionary is selected, press for N , for o , for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each keypress. 3 When you finish writing the word correctly, press to confirm it, or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found one by one, or press , and select Predictive text > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, the word is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary , select Spell , enter the word u sing traditional text input, and select OK . The word is ad ded to the dictionary. When the dictio nary is full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Write compound words Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last pa rt of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off To turn predictive text input off for all editors in the device, press , and select Predictive text > Off . Tip! To turn predictive text input on or off, quickly press twice. Tips on text input To insert a number in the letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between the letter and number mode, press and hold . To switch between the different character modes, press . To delete a character, press . To delete more than one character, press and hold . To use the most common p unctuation marks, press . To open a list of special characters, press and hold . Tip! To insert several specia l charac ters at the same time, press when you select each character.
Messaging 47 Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may va ry, depending on the receiving device. Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settin gs in place. See âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 48 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message and one of the following: Text msg. âÂÂto send a text message Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS) E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail If you have not set up your e-mail accoun t, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . 2 In the To field, press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) th at separates the recipients, press . You can al so copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 In the Subject field, enter the subject of a multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields . 4 In the message field, write the message. To inser t a template, select Option s > Insert or Insert object > Template . 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Imag e , Sou nd clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown. To change the format in which recorded videos are saved, see âÂÂVideo settingsâÂÂ, p. 24. 6 To take a new picture or re cord sound or video fo r a multimedia message, select Insert ne w > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide .
Messaging 48 To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview . 7 To add an attachm ent to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by . Tip! To send other file types as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a sing l e message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or mo re messages. Your service provider may charge accordi ngly. Characters that use accents or other marks, an d characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be se nt in a single message. E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! You ca n combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedi a message, and select Options > Create presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free . See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a message from your service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For availability of and subs cription to data services, contact your service provider. Follow the i nstructions given by your service provider. Enter the MM S settings manually 1 Press , and select Tools > Set tings > Con nection > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Settings > Multim. msg. > Access point in use and the access point you created as the preferred connection. See also âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an IAP correctly. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. If you select Mailbox in the Messag. m a i n v i e w a n d h a v e n o t s e t u p your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54 . You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remot e mailbox and internet service provider (ISP).
Messaging 49 InboxâÂÂreceive messages In the Inbox folder, indicates an unre ad text message, an unread multimedia me ssage, data received through infrared, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a m essage, and 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox , press . To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply . To print a text or a multimedia message on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Pri nt . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwis e be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message center. To star t a packet data connection to re trieve the message to y our device, s elect Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound is included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Option s > Ob jects . If the message includes a mu ltimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator. Data and settings Your device can receive many kinds of messages that contain dat a ( ): Configuration me ssage âÂÂYou may receive settings from your service provider or company information management department in a configura tion message. To save the settings, select Options > Save all . Business card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Option s > Save business card . Certifi cates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing tone âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Options > Save . Operat. logo âÂÂTo have the logo shown in the standby mode instead of the servi ce providerâÂÂs own identification, select Option s > Save .
Messaging 50 Calen. entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Option s > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks listed in web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save al l . E-mail notif. âÂÂThe note tells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headline s) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability an d subscription, contact your service provider. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start . See also âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. See also âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No . When you view e-mail messages of fline, your device is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Important: Exercise cau tion when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open conn ection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail and one of the following:
Messaging 51 New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages Selected âÂÂto ret rieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox To stop retrieving messag es, select Cancel . 2 After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status indicators are as follows: The new e-mail (offline or online mode) has not been retrieved to your device. The new e-mail has been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read, and it has not been retrieved to your device. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has been read and the message content has been deleted from the device. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieve d and you are offline, you a r e a s k e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e t r i e v e t h i s m e s s a g e f r o m t h e mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and s elect Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options > Retrieve . You can also receive meeting requests in the mailbox. See âÂÂMeeting requestsâÂÂ, p. 74, and âÂÂCreate calendar entriesâÂÂ, p. 74. To print an e-mail message on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetooth connec tivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . Retrieve e-mail messages autom atically To retrieve messages automatically , select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic re trieval > Header retrieval > Always enabled or Only in home net. , and define when and how often the messages are retrieved. Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmissi on of la rge amounts of data through your service provider's netw ork. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the r emote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove
Messaging 52 the heading as well, you must delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox; th en make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the devic e and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and server . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your device. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-mail from th e device and server, scroll to a n e-mai l that ha s been marked to be deleted during the next conn ection ( ), and select Opti ons > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disconnect . View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you must copy them to a folder in your device. 1 In the Messag. main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders open s. 4 To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings Fill in all fields marked with Mu st be defined or with a red asterisk. Follow the instructions given by your servic e provider. You may also obtain settings from your service provider in a configuration message. Some or all message centers or access points may be preset for your device by your serv ice provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text messages Press , and select Messag. > Options > Settings > Text msg. and from the following: Message centres âÂÂView a list of all text message centers that have been defined. Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, se lect Reduced support .
Messaging 53 Msg. cen tre in us e âÂÂSelect which message center is used to deliver text messages. Receive report âÂÂSelect whether the network sends delivery report s on your mess ages (net work service ). Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message center is ab le to convert text mess ages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. Preferred conn. âÂÂSelect the connection used for sending text messages: GSM network or packet data, if supported by the network. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Reply via same ctr. âÂÂSelect whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message center number (network service). Multimedia messages Press , and select Messag. > Options > Settings > Multimedia message and from the following: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of th e image in a multimedia message: Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , or Large . MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guide d , the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. Select Restrict ed ; the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. Access point in use âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message center. Multim edia re trieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Auto. in home network . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that there is a multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message center. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your device automa tically makes an a ctive packet dat a connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂSelect whether you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements.
Messaging 54 Receive report âÂÂSelect whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a deli very report o f a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect whether you want to prevent your device from sending delivery repo rts of received multimedia messages. Message validity âÂÂSelect how long the message center resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient cann ot be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message center. E-mail Press , and select Messa g. > Options > Set tings > E-mail and from the following: Mailboxes âÂÂSelect a mailbox to change the following settings: Co nnection se ttings , User settings , Retrieval settings , and Autom atic retrieval . Mailbox in use â Select which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. To create a new mailbox, select Options > New mailbox in the mailbox main view. Connection sett ings To edit the settings for the e -mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail and from the following: User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail serv. âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e- mail. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an IAP. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a name f or the mailbox. Mailbox type âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you use the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not upda ted automatically when you are online. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂSelect the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port âÂÂDefine a port for the connection.
Messaging 55 APOP secure login (for POP3 only)âÂÂUse with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the fol lowing: My e-mail addres s âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail serv. âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends yo ur e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service pro vider for m ore info rmation. Access point in use âÂÂSelect an IAP. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. The settings for User n ame , Password, Security (ports) , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mai l . User settings My name âÂÂEnter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs device when the recipientâÂÂs device supports this function. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select During next conn. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-m ail address . Include signatur e âÂÂSelect whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail alerts âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone and a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox. Default encoding âÂÂSelect another encodi ng according to language. Retrieval settings E-mail to retrieve âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only , Size limit , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieval amount âÂÂDefine how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂDefine the f older path for folde rs to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only)âÂÂSubscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those fo lders. Automatic retrieval Header re trieval âÂÂSelect whethe r you want the device to retrieve new e-mail automatically. You can define when, and how often, the me ssages are retrieved.
Messaging 56 Setting the device to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Co ntact your servic e provider for inform ation abou t d ata transmissio n charges. Web service messages Press , and select Messaging > Optio ns > Settings > Service message . Select whether yo u want to receive service messag es. If you wa nt to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content when you receive a s ervice message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topic s and related topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Sett ings > Cell broadcast and from the following: Reception âÂÂSelect whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language âÂÂSelect the languages in which you want to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . Topic detection âÂÂSelect whether the device automatically searches for new top ic numbers, and saves the new numbers with out a name to the topic lis t. Other settings Press , and select Messaging > Option s > Setting s > Other and from the following: Save sent me ssages âÂÂSelect whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, mu ltimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Se nt folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is reached, t he oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂIf a compatible memory c ard is inserted in the device, select Phone memory or Memory card to save your messages.
Make calls 57 Make calls Voice calls Tip! T o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e t h e v o l u m e d u r i n g a c a l l , press or . If you have set th e volume to Mu te , you can still adjust the volume with the or keys. You can make voice calls in the fold-open mo de and view mode. See âÂÂModesâÂÂ, p. 11. 1 To start a voice call, with the fold open, enter the phone number in the standby mode , including the area code. To remove a number, press . For international calls, press twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press or close the cover to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press . Select the call type Voice call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM card to Contacts before yo u can make a call this way. See âÂÂCopy contactsâÂÂ, p. 68. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold in the standby mode. See also âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 112. Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Chan ge number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialed number in the standby mode, press . Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number. Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participa nt in the conf erence call, se lect Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Conference > Add to conference .
Make calls 58 Your device supports conf erence calls between a maximum of six participants, including y ourself. To have a private conversation with one of th e participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private. The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still continue the conference call. When you finish the private conversation, select Options > Ad d to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a partic ipant, select Op tions > Co nferen ce > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a pho ne number To activate speed d ialing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialing keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Spd. dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialing Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice; you do not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for th e entries in contacts, and compares the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognize the voice commands better. The voice tag fo r a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, open a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should n ot rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances. When you use voice dialing, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a short dist ance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialing, in the standby mode, press and hold . If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the headset key to sta rt voice dia ling.
Make calls 59 2 A short to ne is played, an d Speak now is displaye d. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesized voice tag for the recognized contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognized contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel vo ice dialing. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the first available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home), Mo bile (business) , Teleph one , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (busi ness) . Video calls You can make video calls in the fold-open mode and view mode. See âÂÂModesâÂÂ, p. 11. For hands-free video calls, use the view mode. When you make a video call, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to th e video call recip ient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while there is another voice, video, or data call active. Icons: You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, p. 105. 1 To start a video call, with the fold open, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2 Select Options > Video call . If you want to make a hands-free video call, activate the view mode after the call recipient has answer ed the call. Starting a v ideo call may ta ke a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible) you are asked if yo u want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video imag es, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call
Make calls 60 recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sound and may s ee a still image or a grey background graphic. Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . To change between showing video or hearing only sound, select Enable or Disable > Sending video , Sending audio , or Sending audio & video . To zoom your own image, select Zoom in or Zoom out . The zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. To switch the places of the se nt and received video images on the display, select Change image order . Even if you hav e denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video c all. Check the pricing with your service provider. To end the video call, press . Video sharing Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. Simply invite a recipient to view the live vi deo, or a video clip you want to share. Sharing begins auto matically when the recipient accepts the invitation, and yo u activate the correct mode. See âÂÂShare videoâÂÂ, p. 61. Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a 3G UMTS connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your service provider for questions about network availability and fees asso ciated with using this application. To use Video sharing you must do the following: ⢠Ensure that Video sh aring is installed on your Nokia N93. ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p.61. ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 61. If you start the sharing session while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UTMS network. If you invite someone to a sharing ses sion and that personâÂÂs phone is turned off, or the person is not wi thin UMTS network coverage, they do not know that you are sending an invitation. However, you receive an error message th at the recipient cannot accept the invitation.
Make calls 61 Settings Person-to-person connection setti ngs A person-to-person connection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Setting up a SIP profile allows you to establish a live person-to-pe rson connection to another compatible phone. The SIP prof ile must also be established to receive a sharing session. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send you the settings over the air. If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on your contact ca rd for that pers on. Open Con tacts from your device main menu, and open the contact ca rd (or start a new card fo r that person) . Select Opt ions > Add detail > SIP . Enter the SIP address in the format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). UTMS connection settings To set up your UMTS connection, do the following: ⢠Contact your serv ice provider to estab lish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UMTS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Share video To receive a sharing session, the rec ipient must install Video sharing and configure th e required settings on their mobile device. You and the recipient must both be registered to the service before you can start sharing. To receive share invitations, you must be registered to the service, have an active UMTS connection, and be within the UMTS network coverage. Live video 1 When a voice call is activ e, select Opt ions > Share video > Live . 2 The device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select t he SIP address to which you want to send the invi tation, an d Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the recipient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation.
Make calls 62 The loudspeaker is acti ve. You can also use a compatible headset to continue your voice call while you share live video. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. 5 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Clip . A list of video clips opens. 2 Select a video clip you want to share. A preview view opens. To preview the clip, select Option s > Play . 3 Select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a s uitable format to be able to sha re it. Clip must be convert ed for sharing. Continue? appears. Select OK . The device sends the invitation to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the re cipient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 4 Sharing begins automatica lly when the recipient accepts the invitatio n. 5 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Options > Continue to resume sharing. 6 To end the sharing sessi on, select Stop . To end the voice call, press . Accept an invitation When someone sends you a shar e invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you ar e not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation, you c an select: Accept âÂÂto begin the sharing session. If the sender wants to share live video, activate the view mode. Reject âÂÂto decline the invitation. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitation. You can also press to decline the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. To end the sharing session, select Stop . If you shar e a video clip, select Exit . Video sharing ended is displayed.
Make calls 63 Answer or reject a call To answer the call in the fold-open mode, press . If Answer if fo ld opened is set to On , to answer a call in the fold-closed mode, open the fold, and the call starts automatically. Otherwise, open the fold, and press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not want to answer a c all, in the fold-open mode, press to reject it. The caller hears a line busy tone. If you have activated the Call diver t > If busy function to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertâÂÂ, p. 112. When you reject an incoming call with the fold open, you can also send a text mess age to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send msg. . You can edit the text before se nding it. To set up this option and write a standard text message, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, p. 105. Answer or reje ct a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Tip! You can assign a ringing ton e for video calls. Press and select Tools > Profiles , a profile, and Options > Personalise > Video cal l tone . In the fold-open mode, press to answer the video call. To start sending video, activate the v iew mode, and a live video image, recorded video clip, or the image being captured by the camera in your device is shown to the caller. If you want to send a live video image, turn the camera unit to the direction fr om which you want to send the video image. If you do not activate the view mode, video sending is not possible, but you can still hear the other person. A grey screen is shown in place of the video. To replace the grey screen with a still image, see âÂÂCall settingsâÂÂ, Image in video call , p. 105. Even if y ou have deni ed video sen ding during a video ca ll, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provi der. To end the video call, in the view mode or with the fold open, press . Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting .
Make calls 64 To answer the waiting call, pr ess . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, select Swap . Select Options > Tr ansfer to connect an incoming c all or a call on hold with an active cal l and to disconnect yourself from the calls. To end the ac tive call, press . To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Options during a voice call Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Sele ct Options during a call for the available options on your device, including the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send MMS (in UMTS networks only)âÂÂTo send an image or a video in a multimedia messa ge to the other participant of the call. Yo u can edit the m essage a nd change th e recipient before sending. Press to send the file to a compatible device. Send DTMF âÂÂTo send DTMF tone strings, for example, a password. Enter the DTMF stri ng or se arch for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Options during a video call Select Options during a video call for the following options: Enable or Disable (audio in the fold-open mode; video, audio, or both in view mode). Activate hand set (if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached) . Activate hand sfree (fold-open mode only, and if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached ). End active call Change image order Zoom in or Zoom out (view mode only). Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialed calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent
Make calls 65 calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports thes e functions, the device i s switched on, and within the network ser vice area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear rec ent calls in the recent calls main vi ew. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to er ase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, an d press . Call duration To monitor the approximate dura tion of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration . To set the display o f the call duration while a c all is active, select Connect. > Log > Options > Sett ings > Show call duration > Yes or No . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on netw ork features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Optio ns > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code; see âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 109. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connectio ns, press , a nd select My own > Log > Packet data . For example, you ma y be charged for your packet da ta connections by the amount o f data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incom ing Outgoing Missed communica tion events
Make calls 66 To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press to select the general log. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! To see the duration of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Mess aging > Sent . Su be v en t s, s uc h as a te x t m es s ag e se nt i n mo re t ha n on e part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging center, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To filter the log, select Opt ions > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes t o co n fi r m. To r e mo v e a s in g le ev e nt from the log, press . To set the Log duration , select Options > Sett ings > Log duration . The log events remain in the device me mory for a set number of days after wh ic h they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regi ster, and messaging delivery report s are permane ntly delete d. To view the details of a communication event, in the general log view, scroll to an even t, and press . Tip! In the details view, to copy a phone number to the clipboard, select Option s > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connection timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is transferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Contacts (phonebook) 67 Contacts (phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a co ntact card. You can also create contact group s, which allow you to send text messages or e-ma il to many recipients at the same time. You can add received contact information (business cards) to contacts. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . To edit contact ca rds in Contacts , scroll to the contact card you wa nt to edit, and select Options > Edit . Tip! To print contact ca rds on a compatible basi c print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluet ooth connectivity (such as HP De skjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several contact cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit contact card s, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. To attach a small thum bnail image to a contact c ard, open the contact card, and se lect Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Tip! Speed dialing is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialing keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 58. Tip! To send contact informat ion, se lect the card yo u want to send. Select Options > Se nd > Via text message , Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . See âÂÂMe ssagingâÂÂ, p. 44 and âÂÂSend dataâÂÂ, p. 85. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group: (shown only if you have created a group). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâÂÂ, p. 69. To view the amount of contac ts, groups, and the available memory in Contacts , select Options > Contacts info .
Contacts (phonebook) 68 Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a conta ct card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a messag e to the contact to a certain n umber or address. The default number is also used in voice dialing. 1 In the address book, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM dir ectory . Select t he names you want to copy and Opt ions > Copy to Con tacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, press , and select Contacts . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronize your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. SIM directory and services For availability and information on using SIM card serv ices, contact your SIM card vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see th e names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialing numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict calls fro m your devic e to selected phone numbers, select Op tions > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialing list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message center number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialing list.
Contacts (phonebook) 69 When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the caller âÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call an d your device recognizes it). 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the gro ups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing to nes. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group N , and select O K . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a gr oup, sele ct Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from g roup . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Services 70 Services Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible h ypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext mar kup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Press , and select Services . Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in the standby mode. Web access point To access pages, you need web service settings for the page that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the web page. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For more information, contact your service provider. Tip! Settings may be available on the website of your service provider. Enter settings ma nually 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the sett ings for an access point. Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. 2 Press , and select Services > Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmar k . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the current access point. 3 To set the created access poi nt as the default access point, select Options > Se ttings > Access point . Bookmarks view The bookmarks view op ens when you open Services . Your device may have some bookmarks loa ded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acces s them, you should take the same precautions, for sec uri ty or content, as you would with any internet site. indicates the starting pa ge defined for the default access point.
Services 71 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the d ata transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the reque sted re source is stored) is secu re. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryption status, and information about server and user authentication. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. For mo re information , contact your service provider. See al so âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 110. Browse Im portant : Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protecti on against harmful software. To download a page, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field ( ). On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border a round them. To open links and make selections, press . Shortcut: Press to jump to the end of a page, and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous page while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to v iew a chronological list of the pages you visited during a browsing session. To retrieve the latest content from the ser ver, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Sav e as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold . To return to the browser view, select Options > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Optio ns > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages to the device memory or a co mpatible memory card (if inserted), and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Option s > Navigation options > Go to web address .
Services 72 You can download files th at cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ring ing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. To download an item, scroll to the link, and pres s . When you start a download, a list of ongoing, paused, and completed downloads from the current browsing session is displayed. To view the list, select Options > Tools > Downloads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Options to pause, resume, or cancel ongoing downloads, or open, save, or delete completed downloads. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content fr om being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your device, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important : Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sour ces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. 1 To download the item, scro ll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . End a connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect , or to end the connection and cl ose the browser, select Options > Exit . Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory locati on that is us ed to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have
Services 73 accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Advanced o ptions > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Access point âÂÂChange the default access point. See âÂÂConnectionâÂÂ, p. 106. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by yo ur service provider, and you may not be able to change, cr eate, edit, or remove them. Load imgs. & sounds âÂÂSelect whether you want to load images while browsing. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Sh ow images . Font size âÂÂSelect the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characters are not shown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language. Auto. bookmarks âÂÂEnable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂSelect what is shown when you are browsing: Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂDefine the home page. Search page âÂÂDefine a web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sound s embedded on web pages, select a v olume level. Rendering âÂÂIf you wa nt the page layout shown as accurately as possible when in the Small screen mode, select By quali ty . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂEnable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Java/ECM A script âÂÂEnable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂHide or show security notifications. Conf. DTMF sendi ng âÂÂSelect whether you want to confirm before the device sends DTMF tones during a voice call. See also âÂÂOptions during a voice callâÂÂ, p. 64.
Calendar 74 Calendar Use Calendar to remind you of meetings, anniversaries, and to keep track of your tasks and other notes. Create calendar entries Shortcut: In the day, week, or month calendar view, press any key ( â ). An appointment entry opens, and the characters you ente r are added to the Subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note entry opens. 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and one of the following: Meeting âÂÂto remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time Meeting request âÂÂto send a meeting request by e-mail (a mailbox must be defined in the device) Memo âÂÂto write a general entry for a day Anniversary âÂÂto remind you of birthd ays or special dates (entries are repeated every year) To-do âÂÂto remind you of a task that needs doing by a specific date 2 Fill in the fields. T o set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the Alarm time and Alarm date . To add a description for an appointment or a meeting, select Options > Add description . 3 To save the entry, select Done . When the calendar alar ms for a note, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. Th e reminder text stays on the screen. To end the calendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to s nooze, sel ect Snooz e . Tip! You can synchronize your calendar with a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. When creating a calendar entr y, set the desire d Synchronisation option. Meeting requests If you receive a meeting request to the mailbox in your device, the request is saved to the calendar when you open the e-mail.
Calendar 75 You can view received meeting requests in the mailbox or in the calendar. To respond to a meeting request using e-mail, select Options > Respond: . Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle in the bottom right corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 a.m. To switch between the month view, week view, day view, and to-do view, press . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today , press . To send a cale ndar note to a compatible device, select Options > Send . To print calendar entries on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with B luetooth connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150 ), select Options > Print . Manage your calendar entries Deleting past entries in Calendar save s space in your device memory. To delete more than one event at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry > Before date or All ent ries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . Calendar settings To modify Calend ar alarm ton e , Default view , Week starts on , and Week vi ew title , select Options > Settings .
My own 76 My own Visual Radio You can use Visual Radio (network service) as a traditional FM radio with automatic tuning and saved stations. If you tune to stations that offer Visual Radio service, you can view visual information on the display related to the radi o program. The Visual Radio service uses packet data (net work service). You can listen to the FM radio w hile using other applications. To use the Visual Radio servic e, the following conditions are required: ⢠The device must be switched on. ⢠The device must have a valid SIM card inserted. ⢠The station you listen to and the network operator or the wireless service provider you use must support this service. ⢠An internet access point must be defined to access the service providerâÂÂs Visual Radio server. See âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. ⢠The station must have the correct Visual Radio service ID defined and Visual Radio service enabled. See âÂÂSaved stationsâÂÂ, p. 78. If you do not have access to the Visual Radio ser vice, the operators and radio st ations in your area may not support Visual Radio. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attached to the device f or the FM radio to function properly. You can listen to the radio with the built-in loudspeaker or a compatible headset. When using the loudspeake r, keep the headset plugged in the device. The lead of the headset functions as the antenna of the radio, so let it hang freely . Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuo us exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device nea r your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an active call. When the call is finished, the radio is turned back on. The radio selects the used frequency band base d on the country inform ation received from the network.
My own 77 Visual Radio can be used for listening when the device cover is closed. Channel information may be displayed on the cover display. To mute or unmute the radio, press . Listen to the radio Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio stat ion in that particul ar area. Connect a compatible headset to the device. The lead of the headset functions as the radi o antenna, so let it hang freely. Press , and select My own > Radio . To start a station se arch, select or . Searching stops when a station is found. T o change the frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have previously saved radio stations, select or to go to the next or previous saved station. T o select the memory location of a stat ion, press the corresponding number key. To adjust the volume, press or . To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, select Optio ns > Acti vate loudspea ker . To view available stations based on location, select Options > Station directory (network service). To save the current tuned station to your station list, select Option s > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > St ations . See âÂÂSaved stationsâÂÂ, p. 78. To return to the standby mode and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Option s > Play in background , or press . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. To view available visual conten t for a tuned station, select , or in the stations view, select Options > Station > Start visual servic e . If the visual service ID has not been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrie ve to search for it in the station dire ctory (network service). When the connection to the vi sual service is established, the display shows the current visual content designed by the content provider.
My own 78 To adjust di splay setting s fo r the visual content view, select Options > Display sett ings > Lighting or Power saver time-out . Saved stations You can save up to 20 r adio stations in Visual Radio. To open your station list, select Options > Statio ns . To listen to a saved station, selec t Options > Station > Listen . To vi ew available v isual conten t for a statio n with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Start-up tone âÂÂTo select whether a tone is played when the application is started. Auto-start service âÂÂTo have the Visual Radio service start automatica lly when you select a saved station that offers visual serv ice, select Yes . Access point âÂÂTo select the access point used for the data connection. You do not need an a ccess point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. RealPlayer Press , and select My own > RealPlayer . With RealPlayer , you can play video clips or s tream media files over the air. You can ac tivate a streaming link when you browse web pages, or store it in the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted). Tip! You can also view video clips or streaming links in your device with other compatible UPnP devices, such as a TV or a PC, through wireless LAN. See â View media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as .3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all th e variatio ns of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may in clude content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this de vice. Play video clips 1 To play a media file stored in device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted), select Options > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer
My own 79 Saved clip âÂÂto play a file saved in Gallery See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 30. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the fi le. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to nor mal screen mode. Shortcuts during play are as follows: ⢠To fast forward, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the media file, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an IAP for your default access point. Ot her se rvice provid ers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be configured when you first sta rt your device. Contact your service pro vider for m ore info rmation. In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer recognizes an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a web page, or re ceived in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a spec ial text message from the service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. For more information, co ntact your service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and fro m the following: Video âÂÂto have Real Player automatically repeat video clips after they fini sh playing Connection âÂÂto select wh ether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy sett. : Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server. Glossary : Proxy servers are inte rmediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers
My own 80 use them to provide additional security or speed up access to browser pages th at contain sound or video clips. Netw. se tt. â â¢ Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the internet, and press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you pause a media clip playing through a network link. Select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the serverâÂÂs port range. The minimum va lue is 1024. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the serverâÂÂs port range. The maximum value is 65535. Select Options > Advanced settings to edit th e bandwidth values for different networks. Flash Player With Flash Player, you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mob ile devices. Organize flash files Press , and select My own > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flas h file, scr oll to it, and press . To send a flash file to a compatible device, scroll to it, and press . To copy a flash fi le to another folder, select Organise > Copy to folder . To move a flash file to another folder, s elect Organise > Move to folder To create a folder to organize your flash files, select Organise > New folder . The available options may vary. To delete a flash file, scroll to it, and press . Play flash files Press , and select My own > Flash Player . Scrol l to a flash file, and pres s . Select Options and from the following: Pause âÂÂPause the playback Stop âÂÂStop the playback Volume âÂÂAdjust the playback vo lume. To increase or decrease the volume scroll left or right
My own 81 Quality âÂÂSelect the playback quality. If the playback appears uneven and slow, change the Quality setting to Normal or Low . Full screen âÂÂPlay the file using the entire display. To return to the normal scr een, select Normal screen . Even though not visible in full scre en, the key functions may still be available when you press either key below the display. Fit to screen âÂÂPlay the file in its original size after zooming it Pan mode on âÂÂMove around the display with the scroll key when you have zoomed in The available options may vary. Movie director Press , and select My own > Movie , or launch it from the gallery. Muvees are styled video clips that can contain videos, images, music, and text. The style determines the transitions, visual effects, graphics, music, and text that are used in the muvee. Create muvees 1 In the Movie director main view, select the videos and images with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Create muv ee ; or open the Images & video folder in Gallery . Select the video clips and images you with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. Movie director uses the music and text associated with the chosen style. 3 Select Create muvee . The muvee is created automatically, and a Previe w view is displayed. You can select Save to save the muvee in the Gallery, Recreate to shuffle the media files and create a new muvee, or Back to select a different style for your muvee. You can also select Customise to change the muvee settings and create a custom muvee to which you can add images, music, and text. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie directo r main view, select the videos and images with which you want to create a muvee, and select Options > Create mu vee ; or select the Images & video folder in Gallery . Select the videos and images with which you want to cr eate a muvee, and select Options > Edit > Create muvee . 2 Select a style for the muvee from the style list. In the style view, select Option s > Customis e and from the following: Videos & Images âÂÂselect from the following:
My own 82 ⢠Add/Remove âÂÂAdd or remove video clips and images or Add/Remove > Capture to open the camera application to capture new video clips and images ⢠Move âÂÂReorder the position of video clips and images in the custom muvee ⢠Select contents âÂÂSelect video segments to include or exclude in the muvee Length âÂÂto define the duration of the muvee, select User defined . Se lect Multim edia mes sage , Same as music or Auto-select . If the mu vee duration is less than the music duration, th e muvee is repeated to match the music duration. If the muvee duration is longer than the music duration, the music is repeated to match the muvee duration. Music âÂÂto select a music clip from the list. Message âÂÂto edit the Opening message and Closing message . Settings âÂÂto change the settings for muvee production. Select from the following: ⢠Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees ⢠Resolutio n âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees ⢠Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees 3 Select Create muvee . The muvee is created automatically, and Preview displayed. You can select Save to save the muvee in the gallery, Recreate to shuffle the media file s and create a new muvee, or Customise to return to the muvee settings. Games Press , and select My own and a game. For instructions on how to play the game, select Options > Help .
Connectivity 83 Connectivity PC connections You need to connect your de vi ce t o a c o m p a ti b l e P C t o do the following: ⢠Transfer information between Nokia PC Suite applications and your device. For example, to synchronize calendar appointments or transfer images. ⢠Use your device as a modem to connect to network services such as the internet. You can connect your device and a compatible PC via a compatible USB or serial cable, Infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. Detailed installation instructions can be found in th e user guide for Nokia PC Suite. Tip! When using Nokia PC Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use the Get Connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite. Data cable Press , and select Connect. > Data cbl. > Media player , PC Suite , Mass storage , or Image pr int . To ha ve the device ask the purpose of the connection each time the cable is connected, select Ask on connection . Bluetooth connectivity You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with wireless Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as headse ts and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, v ideo clips, music and sound clips, and notes; connect wirelessly to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); and connect to a compatible printer to p rint images with Image pr int . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Since devi ces with Bluet oot h technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only
Connectivity 84 need to be within 10 meters (33 feet) of ea ch other, but the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specifi cation 2.0 supporting the following profile s: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a service or a function, and defines how different devices connect. For example, the Hands-Free Profile is used between the handsfree device and the phone. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 109 for more information on locking the device. Settings Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. After you set Bluetooth connectivity on and change My phone's vi sibility to Shown to all , your dev ice and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. Select from the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSelect On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, firs t set Bluetooth connectivity On , then establish a connection. My phone's visibi lity âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Blueto oth technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name of your device. Remote SIM mode âÂÂTo enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancemen t, to use the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On .
Connectivity 85 Remote SIM mo de To use the remote SIM mode with a compatible car kit enhancement, set Bluetooth connectivity on, and enable the use of the remote SIM mode with your device. Before the mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and the pairing initiated fr om the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digit passcode, and set the other device as authorized. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. When the remote SIM mode is on in your Nokia device, Remote SI M is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless ne twork is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card serv ices or features requiring cellular network coverage. However, a wireless LAN connection remains active during the remote SIM mode. Warning: In the remote SIM mode, you cannot make or receiv e any calls with your device, exc ept make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require networ k coverage. To make calls, you must first exi t the remo te SIM mode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code. To exit the remote SIM mode, press , and select Exit rem. SIM mode . Security tips When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibili ty > Hidden . In this way, you can better cont rol who can find your device with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology, and connect to it. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. In this way, you can better protect your device from harmful conten t. Send data Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connectivity indicators ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, Bluetooth connectiv ity is on. ⢠When is blinking, your device is tryi ng to connect with another device. ⢠When is shown c ontinuo usly, data is being transmit ted using Blue tooth conn ectivity. 1 Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery .
Connectivity 86 2 Select the item and Options > Se nd > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth technology within range st art to appear on the display. Device icons are: co mputer, phone, audio or video device, and other device. To interrup t the search, select Stop . 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See âÂÂPair devicesâÂÂ, p. 86. 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in Messag. does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To open the paired devices view ( ), in the Bluetooth application main view, press . Before pairing, create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The pa sscode is use d only once. To pair with a device, select Option s > New paired device . Devices with wireless Bluetoot h technology within range start to appear on the display. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same pass c ode must be entered on the other device as well. After pair ing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorized or una uthorized, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author ization is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorized devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accept ed separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Tip! If you are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is switched off.
Connectivity 87 Receive data When you receive data throug h Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messag. . Messages received through Bluetooth connect ivity are indicated by . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 49. Switch off To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . Infrared connection With infrared, you can transf er data su ch as busine ss cards, calendar notes, and me dia files with a compatible device. Do not point the infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to in terfere with other IR devi ces. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive data using infrared 1 Ensure that the infrar ed ports of the sending and receiving devices are poin ting at each other, and that there are no obstructions between the devices. The preferable distance between the two devices is up to 1 meter (3 feet). 2 The user of the receiving de vice activates the infrared port. To activate the infrared port of your device to receive data through infrared, press , and select Connect. > Infrar ed . 3 The user of the sending device selects t he desired infrared function to st art the data transfer. To send data through infra red, locate the desired file in an application or the f ile manager, and select Options > Se nd > Via infrared . If data transfer is not star ted within 1 minute after the activation of the infrared port , the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . New infrared messages are indic ated by . When blinks, your device is trying to c onnect to the other device or a connection has been lost. When is shown continuously, the infrared connection is active, and yo ur device is ready to send a nd receive data using its infrared port.
Connectivity 88 Home network Your device is compatible with UPnP. Using a wireless LAN access point device or a wireless LAN router, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support wireless LAN to the network, such a s your Nokia dev ice, a compatible PC , a compatible printer, and a c ompatible sound system or a TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. Using the wireless LAN functi on of the Nokia N93 in a home network requires a wo rking wire less LAN home connection setup and the other target home devices to be UPnP enabled and to be connected to the same home network. The home network uses the sec urity settings of the wireless LAN connection. Use the home network feature in a wireless LAN infrastruct ure network with a wireless LAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices using the home network. To manage the settings for Home net. , press , and select Connect. > Home net. You can also use t he home network to view, play, copy, or print compatible media files from Gallery . See âÂÂView media filesâÂÂ, p. 90. Important: Always use one of the available encryption methods to increa se the security of your wireless LAN connection and reduce the risk of unauthorize access to your data. Your device is connected to the home network only if you accept a connection request from another device, or in Gallery , select the option to view, play , print, or copy media files on your Nokia device or search for other devices in the Home net. folder. Important security information When you co nfigure your wir eless LAN ho me network, enable an encryption method, first on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to c onnect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a s afe place separate from the devices. To view or change th e setting s of the wireless LAN Internet access point in your Nokia de vice, see âÂÂAccess poi ntsâÂÂ, p. 106. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the Internet access point. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joinin g the ad hoc network.
Connectivity 89 Your device notifies you if another device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. If you use wireless LAN in a network that doe s not have encrypti on, switch off sharin g Nokia N93 files with other devices, or do not share any pr ivate media files. To change sharing settings, see âÂÂHome network settingsâÂÂ, p. 89. UPnP wizard When you access the home network application for the first time, the setup wizard opens, and helps you to define the home network settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the home network main view, select Options > Run wizard , and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the Home Media Server software from the DVD-ROM supplied with your device. Home network settings To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through a wireless LAN, you must create and configure your wireless LAN home IAP; then configure Home net. . See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. The options related to Ho me net. are not available in Gallery before the settings for Home net. have been configured. Configure sett ings To configure Home net. , select Connect. > Home net . > Settings and from the following: Home acces s point âÂÂSelect Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, Us er defined to select your home Internet access point that is used automatically when you use Home net. , or None . If your home network does not have wireless LAN security settings ena bled, you get a security warning. You ca n continue and switch on the wireless LAN security late r; or cancel defining the access point, and first switch on the wireless LAN security. See Wireless LAN in âÂÂAcce ss pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network. Set sharing on and define content Select Connect. > Home net. > Share content . Content sharin g âÂÂAllow or deny sharin g media file s with compatible devices. Important: Do not set Content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set Content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in
Connectivity 90 the home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & video and Music folders. To select media files for sharing with ot her devices from the Images & video and Music folders or to view the sharing status of Images & video or Music , select Share content . View media files To connect a compatible PC to the home network, you must install the related so ftware from th e DVD-ROM supplie d with your Nokia devi ce. If Content sharing is on in your device, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can v iew and copy the media files you ha ve selected to share in Share content . If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set Content sh aring off. Even if Conten t sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in anot her home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Media files stored in your device To select images, videos, and sound clips stored in your device and show them in an other home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1 In Gallery , select an image, a video clip, or a sound clip. 2 Select Options > Show via h ome net. 3 Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your devi ce, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. Media files stored in th e other device To select media files that are stored on another home network device and show them in your device (or in a compatible TV), do the following: 1 In Gallery , select Home net. . Your device starts the search of ot her compatible de vices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2 Select a device from the list. 3 Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device. 4 Select the image, video clip, or music clip you want to view, and select Option s > Show via home net. (images and video) or Play via home network (music). 5 Select the device in which the file is shown. To stop sharing the media file, select Options > Stop showing . To print images saved i n Gallery through Home net. with a UPnP compatible printer, select the print option in
Connectivity 91 Gallery . See âÂÂImage printâÂÂ, p. 42. Content sharin g does not have to be switched on. To search f iles with di fferent criteria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by . Copy media files To copy or transfer media file s from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options > Organise > Co py to home network or Move to home network . Content shar ing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files fr om the other device to your device, select a file in the other device, and Option s > Copy to phone mem. or Copy to memory card (the name of the memory card if a compatible memory card is available). Content sh aring does not have to be switched on. Synchronization Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables yo u to synchronize your notes, calendar , contacts, or e-mail with various compatible calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the internet. You can also create or edit synchronization settings. The synchronization applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchron ization. For info rmation on Syn cML compatibility, contact the supplier of the application with which you want to synchronize your device data. You may receive synchron ization settings in a special text message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Synchronize data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronization profiles. 1 Select a synchronization profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronizat ion is shown on the display. To cancel synchronization be fore it finish es, select Cancel . 2 You are notified when the sy nchronization is complete. Select Yes to view the log file showing the synchronization status and how many entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not synchronized) in your device or on the server. Connection manager Press , and s elect Conne ct. > Conn. mgr. . To view the status of data connections or end connections in GSM a nd
Connectivity 92 UMTS network and wireless LAN, select Act. data conn . . To search for wirel ess LANs av ailable within range, select Availab. WLAN . Data connections In the active connections view, you can see the open data connections: data calls ( ), packet data connections ( or ), and wireless LAN connections ( ). Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depend ing on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, select Options > Disconnect . To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details . The details shown depend on the connection type. Wireless LAN The available wireless LAN view shows a list of wireless LANs within range, their network mode ( Infrastructure or Ad-hoc ), and si gnal strength indica tor. is shown for networks with encryption, and if your device has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . Create an Internet acce ss point 1 Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. > Availab. WLAN . 2 The device searches for wire less LANs within range. Scroll to the network in which you want to create an Internet access p oint, and select Options > Define access point . 3 The device creates an Intern et acc ess point with d efault settings. To view or change these settings, see âÂÂAccess pointsâÂÂ, p. 106. Device manager Press , and select Connect. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and di fferent configur ation settings from your service provider, or company information management department. Thes e configuration settings may include access point settin gs for data connections and other settings used by different applications in your device. To connect t o a server and rece ive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from service providers, select Options > Enable config. or Disable config. .
Connectivity 93 Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂE nter a password to identify your device to the server. Session mode âÂÂSelect the connection type that is used to connect to the server: Blueto oth or Internet . Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, se lect Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before accepting a configuration from the server, select No . Network authentic. âÂÂSelect if netw ork authentication is used. Modem Press , and select Connect. > Modem . To connect your device to a compatible PC through infrared, to use it as a modem, press . For how to conn ect the devices, see âÂÂInfrared connectionâÂÂ, p. 87
Office 94 Office Recorder To record voice memos, press , and select Office > Recorder . To record a telephone conversation, open Recorder during a voice call. Both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Converter To convert measures from one unit to another, press , and select Office > Converter . Converter has limited accur acy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 In the Type field, select the measure you want to use. 2 In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to convert. In the next Unit f ield, select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 In the first Amount field, enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field chan ges automatically to show the converted value. Base currency and exchange rates Select Type > Currency > Options > Currency rates . Before you can make currency conversions, you must select a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exc hange rates are cleared. Calculator To add, subtract, multiply, divide, and calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited ac curacy and is designed for simple calculatio ns.
Office 95 Notes To write notes, press , and select Office > Notes . You can send notes to compati ble devices, and sa ve plain text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . To print a note on a compatible basic print profile (BPP) equipped printer with Bluetoot h connectivity (such as HP Deskjet 450 Mobile Printer or HP Photosmart 8150), select Options > Print . Zip manager Use the Zip manager application to compress files. Compressed files use less memory and are more convenient to e-mail. To open Zip manager, press , and select Office > Zip . You can perform the following tasks using Zip manager: ⢠Create new archiveâÂÂCreate a new archive file to store compressed ZIP formatted files ⢠Update an archiveâÂÂAdd sing le or multiplecompressed files or directories to an existing archiv e. ⢠Delete filesâÂÂDelete files or directories from an existing archive. ⢠Archive passwordâÂÂSet, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives . ⢠Zip manager settingsâÂÂChange the fol lowing settings: Compession l evel and Include subfolders . You can store archive files on the device or on a compatible memory card. Quickoffice To use the Quickoffice applications, press , and select Office > Quickoffice . A list of files in the .doc, .xls, .ppt, and .txt file formats saved in your device opens. To open a file in its respective application, press . To sort files, select Op tions > Sort files . To open Quickword , Quicksheet , or Quickpoint , press to reach the desired view. Quickword With Quickword , you can view native Microsoft Word documents on the display of your device. Quickword supports colors, bold, ital ics, and underline. Quickword supports the viewing of documents saved in .doc format in Micros oft Wo rd 97 or later. Not all
Office 96 variations or fe atures of the mentioned file formats are supported. See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View Word documents To move in the document, use the scroll key. To search the document for text, select Op tions > Find . You can also select Opt ions and from the following: Go to âÂÂto move to t he start, end, or selected position within the document Zoom âÂÂto zoom in or out Start auto-scroll âÂÂto start automatic scrolling throug h the document. To stop scrolling, press . Quicksheet With Quicksheet , you can read Microsoft Excel files on the display of your device. Quicksh eet supports the viewing of spreadsheet files saved in .xls format in Micros oft Excel 97 or later. Not all variations or fe atures of the mentioned file formats are supported. See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View spreadsheets To move around in the spreadsheet, use the scroll key. To switch between worksheets, select Options > Worksheet . To search the speadsheet for a text within a value or formula, select Options > Find . To change how the spreadsheet is displayed, select Options and from the following: Pan âÂÂto navigate within the current worksheet by blocks. A block contains columns and rows displayed by a screen. To display the columns and rows, select a block and OK . Zoom âÂÂto zoom in or out Freeze panes âÂÂto keep the highlighted row, column, or both visible while you move in the spreadsheet Resize âÂÂto adjust the size of columns or rows Quickpoint With Quickpoint , you can view Microsoft PowerPoint presentations on the display of your device. Quickpoint supports the viewing of present ations created in .ppt format in Micro soft Po werPoint 97 or later. Not all variations or features of th e mentioned file formats are supported.
Office 97 See also âÂÂMore informationâÂÂ, p. 97. View presentations To move between the slide, outline, and the notes view, press or . To move to the next or pre vious slide in the presentation, press or . To view the presentation in full screen, select Options > Full screen . To expand items in the presenta tion outline in the outline view, select Options > Expand . More information If you experience problems with Quickword , Quicksheet , or Quickpoint , visit www.quickoffice.com for more information. Support is also available by sending an e-mail to supportS60@quickoffice.com. Adobe reader With Adobe Reader you can read PDF docum ents on the display of your device. This application has been optimized for PDF document content on handsets and other mobile devices, and provides only a limited set of features compared with PC versions. To access and open documents: â¢P r e s s , a n d s e l e c t Office > Adobe PDF . Select Options > Browse for file to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on a compatible memory card. ⢠Open an e-mail attachment from received e-mail messages (network service). ⢠Send a document using Bluetooth connectivity to your Inbox in Messag. . â¢U s e File mgr. to browse and open documents stored in the device memory and on the me mory card. ⢠B r o w s e w e b p a g e s . E n s u r e y o u r d e v i c e i s s e t u p w i t h a n Internet access point before browsing. For more information on access points, see the user guide for your device. Manage PDF files To browse and manage PDF files, press , and select Office > Adobe PDF . Your recent files are listed in the file view. To open a document, scroll to it, and press . You can also select Options and from the following:
Office 98 Browse fo r file âÂÂto browse for PDF files in the device memory or on a compatible memory car d. Settings âÂÂto modify default zoom level and viewing mode of PDF documents. View PDF files When a PDF file is open, select Options and one of the following: Zoom âÂÂto zoom in, out, or to a selected percentage. You can also resize the document to the screen width, or fit the whole PDF page to the screen. Find âÂÂto search the document for a text. View âÂÂto view the document in full screen. You can also rotate the PDF document by 90 degrees in either direction. Go to âÂÂto move to a selected page, next page, previous page, first page, or last page. Save âÂÂto save the file to device memory or a compatible memory card. Settings âÂÂto modify default zoom level and default viewing mode. Details âÂÂto display the properties of the PDF document. More information For more information, visit www.adobe.com . To share questions, suggestions, and information about the application, visit the Adobe Reader for Symbian OS user forum at http://adobe.com/suppor t/forums/main.html . Barcode reader Use the Barcode application to decode different types of codes (for example, b arcodes and codes in magazines). The codes may contai n informat ion such as URL links, e-mail addresses, and phone numbers. To scan and decode barcodes, press , and select Office > Barcode . To scan a code, select Scan code . Set the code between the red lines on the display. The Barcod e scans and decodes the code, and the decoded information appears on the display. To save the scanned data, selec t Options > Save . The dat a is saved in .bcr format. To view saved decoded information, in the main view, select Saved data . To open a code, press . When viewing the decoded info rmation, the different links, URL links, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses, are
Office 99 indicated by icons on the top of t he display in the direction they appear in the decoded information. Select Saved data > Options and from the following: Scan new code âÂÂto scan a new code Open link âÂÂto open a URL link Add to bookmarks âÂÂto save a URL link to the bookmarks in Web Create message âÂÂto send a text message or an e-mail to a phone number or an e-mail address Add to Contacts âÂÂto add a phone number, e-mail address, or URL address to Contacts Call âÂÂto call a phone number. The available options may vary depending on the highlighted link. The device goes into the standby mode to sav e battery power if Barcode cannot be activated or if no keys are pressed for 1 minute. To continue scanning or viewing saved informa tion, press .
Personalize your device 100 Personalize your device Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured for your service provider. This configuration may incl ude changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more in formation. ⢠To use the standby d isplay for fast access to your mos t frequently used applications, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver, see âÂÂChange the look of your devic eâÂÂ, p. 101. ⢠To customize the ringing tones, see âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 100 and âÂÂAdd ringing to nes for contactsâÂÂ, p. 69. ⢠To chang e the short cuts assigned to , and in the standby mode , see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 104. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mod e, press , and select Clock > Options > Set tings > Cl ock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or animation, press , and select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > General > Welcome note / logo . ⢠To change the main menu view, in th e main menu, select Options > Change view > Grid or List . ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folde r . You can move less used applications into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂset tones To set and customize the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . To change the profile, pres s in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise .
Personalize your device 101 Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. To stop the sound, press any key. When you choose a tone, Tone download s opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start a connection to a web page to download tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be said when your device rings, select Options > Personalise > Say caller's name > On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevente d. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning : In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make calls, you must change profiles to activate the phone function. If th e device has been locked, enter the lock code. Warning: Your device must be switched on to use offline profile. Do not switch the d evice on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. When you have activated the offline profile, you can still use the wireless LAN (if available), for example, to re ad your e-mail or browse on the internet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a wi reless LAN connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. To exit the offline profile, press , and select another profile. The device reenable s wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficie nt signal strength). If a Bluetooth connection is activa ted before using the offline profile, it is deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is automatically reactivated afte r you exit the offline profile. See âÂÂSettingsâÂÂ, p. 84. Change the look of your device To change the look of the di splay, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > T hemes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group
Personalize your device 102 together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalize themes further. The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) ar e indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the m emory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the device memory first. To open a browser connection and download more themes, select Theme downloads . To activate a theme, scroll to it, and selec t Options > Apply . To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Options > Edit to change the settings for Wallpaper and Power saver . To restore the selected theme to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mode Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications . By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch the active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applic ations shortcuts, press , select Tools > Sett ings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Tools 103 Tools Multimedia key To open the shortcut assigned to the multimedia key, press and hold . To open a list of multimedia applications, press . To open the desired application, use the scroll key. To exit the list without selecting an applic ation, press . To change the shortcuts, press and . To change the applications that are shown when you press , select Top , Left , Middle , and Right and th e application. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them. Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . To open a settings group, press . Scroll t o a setting you want to change, and press . Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the la nguage of the display texts in your device also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the lang uage accordin g to the information on your SIM ca rd. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special charac t ers available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text âÂÂSet the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note / logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device.
Tools 104 Select Default to use the default image, Te xt to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 110. After resetting, the device may take a longer ti me to power on. Documents and files are unaffec ted. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 102. Left selection ke y âÂÂAssign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode. Right selection key âÂÂAssign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode. Active standby apps. âÂÂSelect the application shortcu ts you want to appear in the active standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcu ts for the different presses of the centre selection key. The centre selection key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Display Brightness âÂÂAdjust the basic bri ghtness level of the display to lighter or darker. However, in extreme light conditions , the bright ness of the displa y i s automatically adjusted. Power saver time-out âÂÂSelect the time-out period after which the screen saver is activated. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the d isplay is switched off. Cover display Select Personalisation and from the following: Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. If you select User defined in the wallpaper settings, the cropping tool frame is shown on top of the image you selected. The cropping tool frame is the size of the cover display, and you can zoom, rotate, and crop the area of the image you want to be displayed on the cover display. Closing animation âÂÂSelect a short animation to play when you close the cover. Closing tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play whe n you close the cover. Opening tone âÂÂSelect a short tune to play when you open the cover and the device is in the standby mode. Select Calls and from the following:
Tools 105 Answer if fold opened âÂÂSelect No or Yes . If fold cl osed âÂÂSelect End call or Activate loudspe aker . Call settings Send my caller ID âÂÂSelect Yes or No to set your phone to be seen or hidden from th e person you are calling. Otherwise, the value may be se t by your service provider when you subscribe to the network service. Set by network is displayed. Call waiting âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting (network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. To check whether the function is active, select Check status . To set the functio n on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a calle r informing why you could not ans wer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or reject a callâÂÂ, p. 63. Message text âÂÂWrite text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂYou can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video. Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialing, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the device t o briefly display the approximate duration of the last cal l. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbe rs assigned to the speed dialing keys ( â ) can be dialed by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 58. Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On . To answer an incoming call briefly press any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in us e âÂÂThis setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the stand by mode.
Tools 106 Line change âÂÂTo p revent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection Data connections and access points Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, mult iple data connections can be active at the same time, an d access points can shar e a data connection. You can also use a wire less LAN data connection. See âÂÂWireless LANâÂÂ, p. 17. Only one connection in one wireless LAN can be active at a time. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kinds of access points as follows: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the web application to view WML o r XHTML pages ⢠IAP to send and receive e-mail and connect to the internet Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection servic es, contact your service provider. Access points You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 49. Some or all access points may be preset for your devi ce by your serv ice provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. indicate s a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point, and a wireless LAN a ccess point . Tip! T o c r e a t e a n I A P i n a w i r e l e s s L A N , p r e s s , a n d select Conne ct. > Conn. mgr. > Availab. WLAN > Options > Define access point . To create a new access point, select Options > New access point . To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit . Follow the instructions from your servic e provider. Connection name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the data c onnection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. F ill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider.
Tools 107 To be able to use a data connection, the network serv ice provider must support this fe ature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data Follow the instructions from your service provider. Access point name âÂÂYou obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service p rovider. Authentication âÂÂS elect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging center. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect IPv4 settin gs or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4 only)âÂÂEnte r the IP address of your device. DNS address âÂÂIn Primary nam e serv.: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider to obtai n these addresses. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Wireless LAN Follow the instructions from your service provider. WLAN netw. na me âÂÂSelect Enter manually or Search for netw. . If you select an existing network, WLAN netw. mode and WLAN secur ity mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. WLAN netw. mode âÂÂSelect Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a wireless LAN ac cess point device is not needed. WLAN security m ode âÂÂSelect the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2 . If you select Open n etwork , no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. WLAN security sett. âÂÂEnter the settings f or the selected security mode:
Tools 108 Security settings for WEP are as follows: Wep key in use âÂÂSelect the WEP key number. You can create up to four WEP keys. The same se ttings must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. Authentication type âÂÂSelect Open or Shared for the authentication type between your d evice and the wireless LAN access point device. WEP key settings âÂÂEnter WEP encryption (length of the key), WEP key format ( ASCII or Hex adecima l ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 are as follows: WPA mode âÂÂSelect the means of authentication: EAP to use an extensible authentication protocol (EAP) plug-in or Pre-shared key to use a password. Complete the appropriate settings: EAP plug-in settings (on ly for EAP )âÂÂEnter the settings as your service provider instructs. Pre-shared key (only for Pre-shared key )âÂÂEnter a password. The same password must be entered on the wireless LAN access point device. TKIP encryption âÂÂSelect whether Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) is used. Homepage âÂÂDefine a home page. Select Options > Advanced settings and from the following: IPv4 settings : Phone IP address (the IP address of your device), Subnet mask (the subnet IP address), Default gateway (the gateway), and DNS address âÂÂEnter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS server. Contact your internet service provider for these addresses. IPv6 settings > DNS address âÂÂSelect Automatic , Well-known , or User defined . Ad-hoc channel (only for Ad-hoc )âÂÂTo enter a channel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data covera ge, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When ne eded , the device uses a
Tools 109 packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data mo dem to your computer. Wireless LAN Show availability âÂÂSelect whether is displayed when a wireless LAN is available. Scan for networks âÂÂIf you set Show availability to Yes , select how often the device se arch es for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options > Advanced settings . Changing wireless LAN ad vanced settings is not recommended. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage, or the settings may be stored on your USIM card. You can save these settings to your device, view, or delete them in Configs. . Date and time See âÂÂClock settingsâÂÂ, p. 17 an d language se ttings in âÂÂGeneralâÂÂ, p. 103. Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 110. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock, PIN, and PIN2 codes. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 110. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialing of the emergency number. Autolock period âÂÂYou ca n set an autolock period, a time-out after which the device automatically locks. To turn off the autolock period, select None . To unlock the device, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possib le to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Tip! To lock the device manu ally, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone .
Tools 110 Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device mainta ins a list of SIM cards that are recognized as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM s ervices âÂÂYou can set the device to disp lay confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (ne twork se rvice). Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. PIN codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card . After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unbloc k it. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to ac cess some func tions in your device. Lock code (security code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorized use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorized use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe plac e separate from y our device. If you forget the code, contact your service provider. PUK and PUK2 codesâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN co de or PIN2 code, resp ectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the servic e provider whose USIM card is in your device. Certificate management Digital certificates do not gu arantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, yo u can see a list of authority certificates that are s tored in your device. Press to see a list of person al certificates, if available. Digital certificates s hould be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for
Tools 111 actions that involve transferring confidential informatio n. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Imp ortant: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they mus t be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. T he existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificat es for increase d securit y to be available. Certificates ha ve a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid y et is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detai lsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the period of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: Certificate not trusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificate. See âÂÂC hange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 111. Expired certificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certific ate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate ca nnot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the tru st settings Before changing a ny certificate setting s, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Option s > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certi ficate is show n. For example: Symbian installation > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. Internet > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers.
Tools 112 App. installation > Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Track protection object Some copyright-protected music files may include a transaction identifier. Select whether you allow the identifier to be sent with the music file if you send or forward the file. The provider of the music file can use the identifier to track the distribution of the files. EAP plug-ins You can view the E AP plug-ins currently installed in your device (network service). Some Internet access points that use wireless LAN as a data be arer and WPA security mode use the plug-ins for authentication. Call divert Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anothe r phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. To divert voice calls when your number is busy or when you reject incoming calls, select If busy . To check whether option is ac tive, select Check status . To set the option on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Several diverting options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the device. To change the settings, you need the rest riction password from your service provider. Select the desired barring optio n. To check whether option is active, select Check statu s . To set it on or off, select Activate or Cancel . Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting ca nnot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers.
Tools 113 Network Your device can automatical ly switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the wireless service provider)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roamin g agreements between the wireless service providers. Cont act your service provider for more details. Operator se lection âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. I f the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the dev ice sounds a n error tone an d asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreement with yo ur home cellular network. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agr eement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activ ate cell info reception. Enhancement settings In the standby mode, indi ca tes a compatible h eadset is connected, and that the headset is unavailable , or a Bluetooth connection to a h eadset is lost. indicates a compatible loopset is connected and that a Text phone is connected. Select Headset , Loopset, Text phone , Bluetooth handsfree , or Car kit and from the following: Default profile âÂÂSet the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your device. See âÂÂProfilesâÂÂset tonesâÂÂ, p. 100. Automatic answ er âÂÂSet if you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answer is disabled. Automatic an swer is not available for Text phone . Lights (for car kit)âÂÂSet whether lights remain on or are switched off after the time-out.
Tools 114 If you are using a Text phone , you must activate it on your device. Press , and select Tools > Settin gs > Enhanceme nt > Text phone > Use Text phone > Yes . TV configuration Press , and select Tools > TV out . Select from the following: TV system âÂÂSelect PAL for PAL and SECAM TV system format or NTSC for NTSC TV sy stem format. Ratio âÂÂSelect 4:3 or 16:9 . Voice commands You can use voice commands to con trol your device. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your device, see âÂÂVoice dialingâÂÂ, p. 58. To activate enhanced voice commands for starting applications and profiles, press and select Tools > Voice cm. > Profiles . The device creates voice tags for the applications and profiles. To us e enhanced voice commands, press and hold in the standby mode, and say a voice command. The voice command is the name of the application or profil e displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, select Opt ions > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, a bbreviations, and acronyms. To listen to the synthesized voice tag, select Option s > Playback . To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiz er that plays recognized voice tags and commands in the selected device language, select S ynthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, select Reset voice adapts . . Application manager Press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applications an d software to your device: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and so ftware suit able for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifical ly designed fo r your Nokia d evice. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product.
Tools 115 Installa tion files may be tran sf erred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explo rer to tr ansfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation f iles (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amo unts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then u se the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, dele te the message from the Messaging inbox. Install applications and software indicates a .sis application, a Java application, that the application is not fully ins talled, and that the application is installed on a compatible memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other softwa re from trusted s o urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Before installation, note the foll owing: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the appli cation, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 110. ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the orig inal application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask yo u to download it. If there is no access point defined for the appl ication, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 To locate an installation file, press , and select Tools > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a memory ca rd (if inserted) in File mgr. , or open a message in Messag. > Inbox that contain s an installation file.
Tools 116 2 In App. mgr. , select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and press to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate i t in the menu, and press . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packages are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send y our installation log to a help desk so that they can see what is installe d or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software pack age or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a soft ware package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that softwar e. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Settings Select Options > Sett ings and from the following: Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check th e online certificates before installing an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default addre ss used when checking online certificates. Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a netw ork connectio n to a specific access point for downloading ext ra data or components. In the App. mgr. main view, scroll to an application, and
Tools 117 select Options > Suit e settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keys for copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, tran sferred or forwarded. To view the digital rights activation keys stored in your device, press , and select Tools > Actv. keys and from the following: Valid keys âÂÂView keys that are connected to one or more media files and keys whose v a lidity period has not started yet. Invalid keys âÂÂView keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key. Not in use âÂÂView keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an in valid act ivation key a nd Options > Get activation key . Activation keys cannot be updated if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 50. To view detailed information, such as the validity status and ability to send the fi le, scro l l to an activation key, and press .
Troubleshooting 118 Troubleshooting Q&A Access code s Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 1234 5 . If you forget or lose the lock code , contact yo ur device de aler. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or wireless se rvice provider. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: To open the application switching window, press and hold . Scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 meters (33 feet) and that there are no walls or other obstructions betwe en the devices. Check that the other device is not in the hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a B luetooth connection? A: If ano ther devi ce is conn ecte d to your device, you can either end the connection using the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Connect. > Bluet ooth > Off . Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displayed: No valid access point d efined. Define o ne in Services setti ngs. ? A: Insert the correct browser se ttings. Contact your service provider for instructions. Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Remove the protective plastic film covering the display and camera. Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Q: Why is there audible noise from the camera when autofocus or optical zoom is used? A: Zoom and AF lens movement causes mechanical noise. S elect Op tions > Settings > Optical zoom during recording > Off to eliminate mechanical noise caused by lens movement when recording.
Troubleshooting 119 Q: Why do images or videos captured using night mode tend to be noisier under dark lighting conditions compared to normal mode? A: The output of the image se nsor unde r the dark lighting conditions is more amplified wi th night mode than with normal mode to provide better brightnes s. In return, th e noise level on the image or video increases. Q: Why do VGA video frames appear j agged when video stabilization is activated? A: Each video frame is enlarged from a smal ler size within VGA to the VGA size when video stabilization is activated. Due to this, the quality w ithin each frame is degraded compared to video without stabilizati on mode. Display Q: Why do missing, dis colored, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristi c of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Home network (UPnP) Q: Why canâÂÂt I share files with other devices? A: Ensure that you h ave conf igured the home network settings. Select Connect. > Hom e net. > Share cont ent > Content sha ring , and the other device is UPnP compatible. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, select My ow n > Log > Options > Filt er > All communication . Memory low Q: What can I do if my device memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messag. ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the device memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Galle ry To delete contact information, cale ndar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, o r any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform op eration. Delete some d ata first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before del eting it? A: Save your data using one of the fo llowing methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back-up copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail a ddress, then save the images to your computer.
Troubleshooting 120 ⢠Send data using Bluetooth connectivity to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compat ible memory card. Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The cont act card does n ot ha ve a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Multimedia me ssaging Q: What should I do when the device cannot receive a multimedia message because memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough m emory to retrieve mes sage. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, select File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a mul timedia message from the multimedia messaging center. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Select Messagi ng > Options > Settings > Multim. msg. . Q: How can I end the data connect ion when the device starts a data connecti on again and aga in? A: To stop the de vice from making a data connection, select Messaging and one of the following: On receiving msg. > Defer retrieval âÂÂto have the multimedia messaging center save the message t o be retrieved later, for example, after you have checked the settings. After this change, the device still needs to send information notes to t he network. To retrie ve the message now, select Retr. immediately . On receiving msg. > Reject message âÂÂto reject all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device needs to send information no tes to the networ k, and the multimedia messaging center deletes mult imedia messages that are waiting to be sent to you. Multimed ia recept. > Off âÂÂt o ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After this change, the device does not make any ne twork connectio ns related to multimedia messaging. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device t o my PC? A: Ensure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the user guide for Nokia PC Suite on t he DVD-ROM. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.noki a.com.
Troubleshooting 121 Wireless LAN Q: Why can't I see a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN acces s point ma y use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can only access ne tworks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID and have created a WLAN internet access point for the network on your Nokia d evice. Q: How do I switch wireless LAN (WLAN) off on my Nokia device? A: You cannot switch off WLAN on your Nokia device. To reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia d evice does not sca n for available networks. To turn off the background scan: 1 Press , and select Tools > Setting s > Connection > Wireless LAN . 2 Select Scan for networks > Never . 3 To save your changes, select Done . When Scan for networks is se t to Never , your Nokia device still listens to available netw orks, and you can us e available WLAN networks as usua l.
Battery information 122 Battery information Charging and disc harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter th an normal, replace the b attery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is b eing used for the first t ime or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the ba ttery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be mad e. Use the battery only for it s intended purpose. Ne ver use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circui ting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the p ositive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the conne cting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the b attery. Always try to keep the b attery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not wo rk temporaril y, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, l ook for the Nokia Original
Battery information 123 Enhancements logo on the packaging, and inspect the hologram label using the following s teps: Successful completion of the four steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. I f you have any reason to believe that your batt ery is not an authentic original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it and t ake it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorized Noki a s ervice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authen ticity. If authen ticity cannot be verified, return the battery to th e place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 do ts on each side respectively. 3 Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-digit code, for exampl e, 12345678919876 543210. Turn the battery so th at the numbers are facing upwards. The 20-digit code reads starting from the number at the top row followed by the bottom row. 4 Confirm that the 20-digit code is valid by following the instructions at www.nokia.com/batterycheck. To create a text message, enter the 20-digit code, for example, 12345678919876 543210, and send to 44 7786 2 00276. National and international operator charges will apply. You should receive a message indicating whether the code can be authenticated. What if your b attery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an auth entic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorized Nokia service point or dealer for assist ance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufa cturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device
Battery information 124 and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approv al or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery.
Care and maintenance 125 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated w ith ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty co verage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitati on, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the de vice to dry co mpletely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving pa rts and ele ctronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open t he device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device. Rough handling can break intern al circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to cle an the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operat ion. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light s ensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of da ta you want to keep (such as contacts and calen dar notes) before sending your device to a service facility. ⢠To allow the device to re set, power the device off, and remove the battery from time to time for optim um performance. Make back-up copi es of all important data. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhanc em ent. If any device is not working properly, take it to t he nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 126 Additional safety information Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off yo ur device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position ag ainst the ear or when pos itioned at leas t 2.2 c entimeters (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device t he above-stated distance from your body. In order to t ransmit data fi les or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of dat a files or messages may be d elayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance inst ruct ions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are mag netic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit card s or other magnetic storage media near the devi ce, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeter s (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These re commendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 ce ntimeters (6 inches) from their pacemaker ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move the device away.
Additional safety information 127 Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperl y instal led or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti skid (antilock) braking systems, electronic spee d control syste ms, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any e quipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should s ervice the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Fault y installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gas es, or explosive materials in the same compartment as th e device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that ai r bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipment in t he area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled and the ai r bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft i s prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operat ion of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone ne twork, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a poten tially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advis ed to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless netw orks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies.
Additional safety information 128 To make an emerg ency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Chec k for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain feature s are in use, you may first need to turn t hose features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call un til given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) THIS MOBILE DEVICE MEETS GUIDELINE S FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitte r and receiver. It is designed not to exce ed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by internationa l guidelines. These gui delines were developed by the indepe ndent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assu re the protection of all persons , regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using st andard operating positions wit h the device transmitting at its highest certified power l evel in all tested frequency bands. Th e actual SAR level of an operating device can be belo w the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That a mount chan ges depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a netw ork base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 0.54 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements ma y result in different SAR values. SAR valu es may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
129 Index A access points 106 activatio n keys 117 alarm cloc k 16 applications 114 , 115 B backing up 20 Bluetooth 83 device address 86 headset 113 pairing 86 security 85 switching off 87 bookmarks 70 C cache, clearing 72 calendar 74 call register. See log. calls dialled numbers 64 duration 65 international 57 received 64 settings 105 settings for call diverting 112 transferring 64 camera adjusting lighting and color 28 editing videos 31 flash 28 image setup s ettings 28 imaging mode 12 saving video clips 23 scenes 28 self-timer 27 sequence mode 27 still image camera settings 26 video recorder settings 24 certificates 110 clear screen. See standby mode. clock 16 , 17 codes 109 , 110 computer connections 83 conference call 57 connection settings 106 contact c ards inserting pictures 67 sending 67 storing DTMF tones 64 copying contacts 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data connections ending 92 indicators 15 date 16 device manager 92 digital rights management. See activation keys. E editing videos 31 , 32 e-mail 47 automatic retrieving 51 opening 51 remote mailbox 50 retrieving from mailbox 50 settings 54 viewing att achments 51 F file formats .jad, jar and sis 114 .jar 115
130 RealPlayer 78 file manager 21 fixed dialing 68 FM radio 76 G gallery 30 backup files 43 ordering files in albums 35 , 36 presentations 34 TV out mode 34 H handsfree. See loudspeaker. headset settings 113 help application 22 home network 19 I IAP. See access points. indicators 15 internet. See web. J Java. See applications. 114 L lock code 110 log 66 loopset settings 113 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 50 , 51 media files 78 , 79 memory 21 , 65 memory card 20 menu, rearranging 100 messaging 47 modem 93 modes 11 , 12 movies, muvees 81 multimedia messages 47 music player 39 transferring musi c 40 N Nokia PC Suite calendar data 74 transferring music files to your memory card 39 viewing device memory data 22 O office applications 95 P packet data connections 108 PC connections 83 personalization 101 phonebook See contact cards profiles 100 Q Quickoffice 95 R radio 76 RealPlayer 78 remote mailbox 50 remote SIM mode 85 ringing tones personal ringing tone 69 receiving in a text message 49 S security code. See lock code. sending contact and business cards 67 video clips 33 service commands 45 settings access codes 109 access points 106 Bluetooth connectivity 84 calendar 75 call barring 112 call diverting 112 certific ates 110 data connections 106 date and time 109
131 display 104 language 103 lock code 110 original settings 104 personalizing the device 100 PIN code 110 screen saver 104 UPIN code 110 UPUK code 110 shortcuts 13 SIM card copying na mes and numbers 68 messages 52 sis file 114 snooze 16 software 115 songs transferring 40 sound clips 30 sounds muting a ringing to ne 63 recording sounds 94 speed dialling 58 standby mode 100 svg files 34 synchronization 91 T text messages 47 themes 101 time 16 transferring content 14 transfer ring music 40 U UPIN code 110 UPnP 19 , 88 UPUK code 110 USSD commands 45 V video call 59 , 63 video clips 30 video player. See RealPlayer . Visual Radio 76 , 77 voice commands 114 voice dialling 58 voice mailbox 57 , 112 voice messages 57 voice tags 58 , 114 volume con trol 16 , 57 W web 70 wireless LAN 17 access point settin gs 107 create IAP 92 security 88 See also UPnP.